Mitsubishi Electric M800VW Series Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Mitsubishi Electric Manuals
  4. Control Systems
  5. M800VW Series
  6. Programming manual

Mitsubishi Electric M800VW Series Programming Manual

Plc programming
Hide thumbs Also See for M800VW Series:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Table Of Contents
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Mitsubishi Electric M800VW Series

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi Electric M800VW Series

  • Page 2 Introduction This manual describes the PLC instructions required to create sequence programs of Mitsubishi Electric CNC. The PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) instructions are largely categorized into the basic instructions, function instructions and exclusive instructions. There are many types of instructions. The instructions can be used in accordance with the purpose and application, such as the PLC support function which assists user PLCs.
  • Page 3 Manual List Manuals related to M800V/M80V Series are listed as follows. These manuals are written on the assumption that all optional functions are added to the targeted model. Some functions or screens may not be available depending on the machine or specifications set by MTB. (Confirm the specifications before use.) The manuals issued by MTB take precedence over these manuals.
  • Page 4 Manuals for MTBs (NC) Manual IB No. Purpose and Contents  Model selection M800V/M80V Series IB-1501610 Specifications Manual (Function)  Outline of various functions  Model selection M800V/M80V Series IB-1501611 Specifications Manual (Hardware)  Specifications of hardware unit  Detailed specifications of hardware unit M800VW/M80VW Series IB-1501612 Connection and Setup Manual...
  • Page 5 (Monitor) GOT2000 Series Connection Manual  Outline of connection types and connection method between SH-081197ENG (Mitsubishi Electric Products) GOT and Mitsubishi Electric connection devices GT Designer3 (GOT2000) Screen  Outline of screen design method using screen creation SH-081220ENG Design Manual...
  • Page 6 Reference Manual for MTBs Manual Purpose and Contents M800/M80 Series Smart safety BNP-C3072-022  Explanation for smart safety observation function observation Specification manual M800/M80 Series CC-Link (Master/ BNP-C3072-089  Explanation for CC-Link Local) Specification manual M800/M80 Series PROFIBUS-DP BNP-C3072-118  Explanation for PROFIBUS-DP communication function Specification manual M800/M80 Series Interactive cycle BNP-C3072-121-...
  • Page 7 Precautions for Safety Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit. This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING"...
  • Page 8 For Safe Use Mitsubishi Electric CNC is designed and manufactured solely for applications to machine tools to be used for industrial purposes. Do not use this product in any applications other than those specified above, especially those which are substantially influential on the public interest or which are expected to have significant influence on human lives or properties.
  • Page 9 This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users and Annex II. Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be recycled and/or reused. This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste.
  • Page 10 MELDAS, MELSEC, EZSocket, EZMotion, iQ Platform, MELSEC iQ-R, MELSOFT, GOT, CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, CC-Link IE, CC-Link IE/field, EcoMonitorLight and SLMP are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation in Japan and/or other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
  • Page 11 本製品の取扱いについて ( 日本語 /Japanese) 本製品は工業用 ( クラス A) 電磁環境適合機器です。販売者あるいは使用者はこの点に注意し、住商業環境以外での使 用をお願いいたします。 Handling of our product (English) This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. 본...

  • Page 12: Table Of Contents

    Contents Chapter 1 - 11 : Refer to "PLC Programming Manual (1/2)" Chapter 12 and later : Refer to "PLC Programming Manual (2/2)" 1 Outline................................1 2 PLC Processing Program..........................3 2.1 Outline of PLC Processing Project..........................4 2.2 Multi-Project Function ............................... 5 2.2.1 Outline ................................
  • Page 13 5 Languages Used in Sequence Programs ....................57 5.1 Ladder Diagram Language ............................. 58 5.2 Structured Text ............................... 59 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions ..................... 61 6.1 Instruction List................................. 63 6.1.1 How to Read Instruction Table........................63 6.1.2 Basic Instructions ............................65 6.1.3 Comparison Operation Instructions........................
  • Page 14 8.7 Rotation Instructions ............................. 280 8.8 Bit Processing Instructions............................ 293 8.9 Data Processing Instructions ..........................295 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions......................309 8.11 Special Function Instructions ..........................354 8.12 Other Function Instructions ..........................423 9 Exclusive Instructions ..........................425 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction ............................. 427 9.1.1 Outline of ATC Control ..........................
  • Page 15 13 Spindle Control ............................489 13.1 Related Parameters............................490 13.2 Connection Method............................. 491 13.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data............................. 492 13.4 Selecting Z Phase Detection Method ......................... 493 13.5 Proximity Switch Method Orientation........................494 13.6 Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control ........................495 13.6.1 Outline................................
  • Page 16 13.13.3 Relation with Other Functions ........................553 13.13.4 Precautions .............................. 554 13.14 Multiple Spindle Synchronization Set Control ....................555 13.14.1 Outline ..............................555 13.14.2 Function Enabling Conditions........................557 13.14.3 Precautions .............................. 557 14 PLC Help Function ..........................559 14.1 Program Format Switch ............................561 14.1.1 Outline ................................
  • Page 17 14.14 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation ..................644 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) ..................645 14.15.1 Outline..............................645 14.15.2 Tool Data Flow (R register) ........................647 14.15.3 Operation When a T Command (Tool Command) is Executed..............649 14.15.4 Operation When Spindle Tool is Changed....................650 14.15.5 Operation When a Tool Has Reached the End of Its Tool Life ..............
  • Page 18 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed ..........................734 14.27.1 Outline ..............................734 14.27.2 System Configuration ..........................735 14.27.3 Detailed Specifications ..........................737 14.27.3.1 Requirements for 3-Dimensional Manual Feed ................737 14.27.4 Operation Example of Feed in Hypothetical Coordinate System ............. 738 14.27.4.1 Coordinate System Selection - Tool Axis Coordinate System Example.......... 738 14.27.4.2 Coordinate System Selection - Table Coordinate System Example..........
  • Page 19 14.34.2.2 Operation Function: Manual Mode ....................829 14.34.2.3 Operation Function: JOG Mode ...................... 830 14.34.2.4 Operation Function: Incremental Feed .................... 832 14.34.2.5 Operation Function: Manual Handle Feed ..................833 14.34.2.6 Operation Function: Reference Position Return................834 14.34.2.7 Machine Compensation Function: Backlash Compensation ............835 14.34.2.8 Protection Function: Interlock ......................
  • Page 20 15.5 Sub Part System Control I........................... 903 15.6 Sub Part System Control II..........................904 16 External PLC link............................ 905 16.1 CC-Link ................................906 16.1.1 Performance Specifications........................908 16.1.2 Usable Functions............................911 16.1.2.1 Machine Input/Output Signal Allocation by CC-Link ................. 912 16.1.2.2 File Register by CC-Link........................

  • Page 22: Outline

    Outline IB-1501667-B...
  • Page 23 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 1 Outline This programming manual is used when creating a sequence program for this CNC using the MELSEC PLC development software package (GX Developer/GX Works2). The PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) instructions are largely categorized into the basic instructions, function instructions and exclusive instructions.

  • Page 24: Plc Processing Program

    PLC Processing Program IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 25: Outline Of Plc Processing Project

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.1 Outline of PLC Processing Project 2.1 Outline of PLC Processing Project In M8V series, the project is divided into each machine sequence, the multiple divided projects can be independently controlled/started by one CNC.

  • Page 26: Multi-Project Function

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.2 Multi-Project Function 2.2 Multi-Project Function 2.2.1 Outline Multi CPU configuration of MELSEC sequencer is mounted as the CNC specification. The multiple projects can be independently managed/ started up by one CNC with this function. It is enabled when the number of the project to be used is changed on the multi project parameter setting screen.

  • Page 27: Range Of Usable Project

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.2 Multi-Project Function 2.2.2 Range of Usable Project The range of usable project differs depending on the models as follows. M800V Series 1 to 6 projects (3 projects and more will be additional specifications.) M80V Type A, M80VW 1 to 3 projects M80V Type B...

  • Page 28: Plc Processing Program Level And Operation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.3 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation 2.3 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation The user PLC processing works following the lebel shown below. [PLC processing level] Program name Description (frequency, level, etc.) Initial processing program This program starts only once at power ON.
  • Page 29 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.3 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation The following is the example of the built-in PLC (built-in edit function) setting screen. Set the project execution order in a way that does not to have the duplication of the number in the setting range from 1 to 6, regardless of the usable project number.

  • Page 30: Outline Of Plc Processing Program (Two Program Method)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.4 Outline of PLC Processing Program (Two Program Method) 2.4 Outline of PLC Processing Program (Two Program Method) The M8V Series program execution control methods include the conventional method which controls with one program, and the method that splits the program into multiple sections for each control unit.

  • Page 31: Multi-Program Method

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.6 Multi-Program Method 2.6 Multi-Program Method Several sequence programs can be registered in the CNC and sequentially executed. By using this function, the sequence program can be split into each process and developed. The multi-program method is used by designating an execution type and execution order in the setting screen in GX Developer/GX Works2 and sending the parameter files to the NC.

  • Page 32: Program Execution Order

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.6 Multi-Program Method 2.6.2 Program Execution Order Several programs are executed in a predetermined order. They are not executed simultaneously. The order is determined in the setting screen in the development tool (GX Developer/GX Works2 or built-in PLC (built-in edit function)). The programs are executed from the smallest number in the same execution type.

  • Page 33: User Plc Data Area Configuration And Size

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.7 User PLC Data Area Configuration and Size 2.7 User PLC Data Area Configuration and Size The approximate configuration and size of user PLC data area are as shown below. The areas, the sequence program area and the data area of the figure below are created in order from project 1.

  • Page 34: Single-Program Method

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.7 User PLC Data Area Configuration and Size 2.7.1 Single-Program Method P4001 Sequence program storage area (high-speed) High-speed The program other than main processing is not requirement. P4002 processing The program order of initialization, high-speed and main is (Medium arbitrary.

  • Page 35: Storing Plc Processing Program And Execution Mode

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 2 PLC Processing Program 2.8 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode 2.8 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode The user PLC data area storage method and the PLC processing program execution method are explained. User PLC data area is stored in the non-volatile ROM (hereinafter, built-in ROM) and a sequence program is executed according to the following path.

  • Page 36: Input/Output Signals

    Input/Output Signals IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 37: Input/Output Signal Types And Processing

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 3 Input/Output Signals 3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing 3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing The input/output signals handled in user PLC are as follows:  Input/output from/to controller  Input/output from/to operation board (*1) ...

  • Page 38: Handling Of Input Signals Designated For High-Speed Input

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 3 Input/Output Signals 3.2 Handling of Input Signals Designated for High-Speed Input 3.2 Handling of Input Signals Designated for High-Speed Input The input/output signals used in user PLC are input/output for each program level as shown in the figure below. In high-speed processing, input/output signal for which high-speed input or output designation (parameter) is made is input or output each time the high-speed processing program runs.

  • Page 39: Plc Device Assignment Of Digital Signal (Di/Do)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 3 Input/Output Signals 3.3 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO) 3.3 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO) The input/output signals (analog signal, DI/DO, etc.) are assigned to the PLC devices, and the digital signals (DI/DO) can be assigned to the arbitrary PLC devices by the parameters.

  • Page 40: Fixed Device Assignment

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 3 Input/Output Signals 3.3 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO) 3.3.1 Fixed Device Assignment  By setting the parameter "#53001 RIO dev assign" to "0", the PLC device assignment method, which is to be used for input/ output of each remote I/O unit station, will be the fixed device assignment.
  • Page 41 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 3 Input/Output Signals 3.3 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO) High-speed input/output designation method High-speed input/output is designated by setting the corresponding bit of the bit selection parameter as shown below.  High-speed input specification These bits correspond Bit selection to the low-order byte...

  • Page 42: Arbitrary Device Assignment

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 3 Input/Output Signals 3.3 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO) 3.3.2 Arbitrary Device Assignment Parameter setting for device arbitrary assignment  By setting the parameter "#53001 RIO dev assign" to "1", the assignment method for PLC devices to be used for input/out- put of each remote I/O unit station becomes arbitrary device assignment.
  • Page 43 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 3 Input/Output Signals 3.3 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO)  Up to 24 stations can be specified for high-speed input/output specification each for input and output. If 25 or more stations are specified, the alarm "Y05 Initial parameter error" will be issued. ...
  • Page 44 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 3 Input/Output Signals 3.3 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO) Note (1) However, the alarm "Y05 Initial parameter error" caused by the above issues will not occurs in the following cases: - "0" has been set to the target channel. - Remote I/O unit with DI/DO function are not connected to the station which has been specified with the target channel and station number.
  • Page 45 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 3 Input/Output Signals 3.3 PLC Device Assignment of Digital Signal (DI/DO) Operating parameter setting screen  RIO assignment parameter setting rule  For arbitrary device assignment, assign PLC devices to all stations which are connected to the remote units with DI/DO function.

  • Page 46: Explanation Of Devices

    Explanation of Devices IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 47: Devices And Device No

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.1 Devices and Device No. 4.1 Devices and Device No. When the single project is switched to the multi-project, the number of devices that can be used in one project will be fewer in accordance with the maximum number of projects.

  • Page 48: List Of Devices

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.2 List of Devices 4.2 List of Devices The device range in the following table is the default number of device points set in the project 1 when the multi-project setting or the setting of the number of device points is not performed.

  • Page 49: Device Range Setting At Multi-Project

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.3 Device Range Setting at Multi-project 4.3 Device Range Setting at Multi-project Each device will be categorized to either the common device among projects (common device among projects) or the independent device for each projects (independent device among projects) when the multi-project function is used.
  • Page 50 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.3 Device Range Setting at Multi-project The list of device categories is as follows. [Category explanation] Category Details Common Common device among projects Independent (Fixed) Independent device among projects (Fixed points) Independent (Variable) Independent device among projects (Variable points) Common/independent...

  • Page 51: Common Device Among Projects

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.3 Device Range Setting at Multi-project 4.3.1 Common Device Among Projects Devices written below are the ones that are common among projects. The number of points below can be used from each project without being affected by the number of projects. Device Device range X0 to X1FFF...

  • Page 52: Independent Device Among Projects

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.3 Device Range Setting at Multi-project 4.3.2 Independent Device among Projects These following devices are independent for each project. Therefore, the access among projects will not affect the devices. [Write value to D100 from Project 1 & 2] Storing data D100(PRJ1) D100(PRJ2)

  • Page 53: M Device/D Device Commonizing Setting

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.3 Device Range Setting at Multi-project 4.3.3 M Device/D Device Commonizing Setting When using the multi-project function, the arbitrary number of points from the head of M device/ D device can be set as the common device among projects.
  • Page 54 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.3 Device Range Setting at Multi-project Note (1) Set "total number of points set to each project + number of projects common points" to fit into the maximum project points. If the CNC is rebooted while the setting value is exceeding the maximum project points, the user PLC alarm 58 will be issued.

  • Page 55: Detailed Explanation Of Devices

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.1 Input/Output X, Y Input/output X and Y are windows for executing communication with the PLC and external device or controller. Input X ...

  • Page 56: Internal Relays M And F, Latch Relay L

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.2 Internal Relays M and F, Latch Relay L The internal relay and latch relay are auxiliary relays in the PLC that cannot directly output to an external source. Internal relay M ...

  • Page 57: Special Relay Sm, Special Register Sd

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.5 Special Relay SM, Special Register SD  Special relay is the relay whose application is fixed. (i.e. Carry flag of operation result, display request signal to the setting display device, etc.) Do not use the currently unused area from SM0 to SM2047 as the temporary memory.
  • Page 58 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices Setting side Device Name Operation Details (Set time) 0.1-second clock  ON/OFF is repeated by the specified second. System side 0.05s SM410  Starts from OFF when the power is turned ON. (At high 0.05s ...
  • Page 59 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices Setting side Device Name Operation Details (Set time) Device allocation Number of points allocated  Stores the number of points currently set for System side SD290 (Same as parameter con- for X...

  • Page 60: Edge Relay V

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.6 Edge Relay V Edge Relay V  This stores the operation result (ON/OFF information) from the head of ladder block.  This can be used only at contacts. This cannot be used as a coil. Edge relay Operation results of X0,X1 and X10 are stored.

  • Page 61: Timer T

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.7 Timer T The 100 ms timer and 10 ms timer are available for this count-up type timer. The 100 ms timer and 10 ms timer are differentiated by the instructions used. Refer to "7.3 Output Instructions" for details. 100 ms timer T ...
  • Page 62 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.  Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (Fixed timer) ...
  • Page 63 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices  Methods for setting the setting value from the setting and display unit The timer and counter setting value can be set from the parameter setting screen. Steps 1 to 4 also apply for the counter. (1) The set value is validated even when the PLC is restarting.
  • Page 64 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices  Setting example of variable timer The setting example and operation of 10 ms variable timer with the following conditions are shown below. Program side valid setting bit for variable timer: PLC timer screen setting valid Number of variable timer points: 704 T1 device setting value: 100 (1) Set "PLC timer screen setting valid"...

  • Page 65: Integrated Timer St

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.8 Integrated Timer ST The 100 ms integrated timer is available for this count-up type timer. 100 ms integrated timer  When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer contact will turn ON. ...

  • Page 66: Counter C

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.9 Counter C The counter counts up and detects the rising edge of the input conditions. Thus, the count will not take place when the input conditions are ON.

  • Page 67: Data Register D

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.10 Data Register D  The data register is the memory that stores the data in the PLC.  The data register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units. To handle 32-bit data, two points must be used.

  • Page 68: File Register R, Zr

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.11 File Register R, ZR  As with the data registers, the file registers are memories used to store data. However, there are some that have fixed applications, and those that are released.

  • Page 69: Index Register Z

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.12 Index Register Z  The index register is used as ornaments for the device. (*1) MOV K3 K4X0 D5Z0 D5Z0 indicates D(5+Z0)=D8  The index register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units. ...

  • Page 70: Nesting N

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.13 Nesting N  This indicates the master control nesting structure.  The master control nesting N is used in order from smallest No. MC N0 M15 Execute when A condition is set.

  • Page 71: Pointer P

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.14 Pointer P  What is a pointer? A pointer is a device used with branch instructions. A total of 4096 points is used in all executed programs. The reserved pointers use the addresses from 4000 to 4005 separately.

  • Page 72: General Pointers

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.14.1 General Pointers General pointers are pointer which can be used only with the independent program method, which lays importance on compatibility with conventional models. The general pointer can be used with the jump instructions and subroutine call instructions.

  • Page 73: Common Pointers

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.14.3 Common Pointers Common pointers are pointers that can be used only with the multi-program method.  What is a common pointer?  A common pointer is a pointer that calls the subroutine program from all programs executed with the CNC controller. The common pointer can be used only with the subroutine call instruction.

  • Page 74: Reserved Pointers

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.14.4 Reserved Pointers Reserved pointers are pointers with fixed applications. Single-program method P4001 (high-speed): Start label for PLC high-speed processing program. P4002 (medium-speed): Start label for PLC main (ladder) processing program. P4003 (initialization): Start label for PLC initialization processing program.

  • Page 75: Decimal Constant K

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices The following two methods of jumping to the end of each program are available.  Sets the local pointer right before the END instruction and jumps to that position. ...

  • Page 76: Real Constant E

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices 4.4.17 Real Constant E The real constant is used to designate the basic instruction, function instruction and exclusive instruction values.  Single-precision instruction: ±1.17549435-38 to ±3.40282347+38 ...
  • Page 77 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 4 Explanation of Devices 4.4 Detailed Explanation of Devices IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 78: Languages Used In Sequence Programs

    Languages Used in Sequence Programs IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 79: Ladder Diagram Language

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 5 Languages Used in Sequence Programs 5.1 Ladder Diagram Language The following languages are supported by GX Developer and GX Works2. GX Works2 Programming lan- GX Developer Simple project guage Structured project With labels Without labels Ladder ○...

  • Page 80: Structured Text

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 5 Languages Used in Sequence Programs 5.2 Structured Text 5.2 Structured Text Structured text is a programming language that have the similar structure to control syntax. Syntaxes such as condition determination or repetitions can be written. This language is suitable to program complex processes that is difficult to be programed in a graphic language (ladder diagram language).
  • Page 81 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 5 Languages Used in Sequence Programs 5.2 Structured Text IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 82: Explanation Of Instructions And Functions

    Explanation of Instructions and Functions IB-1501667-B...
  • Page 83 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions This chapter shows the list of instructions (common instructions) and functions (application function). Term Description Common instruc- A generic term for basic instructions and function instructions. Instruction tion A generic term for functions (functions and function blocks) defined in the international standard Application func- Function...

  • Page 84: Instruction List

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.1 How to Read Instruction Table The instruction tables have been made according to the following format. Refer- No. of steps Process Instruction Execution Class...
  • Page 85 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List (5) Indicates the type of processing that is performed by individual instructions (D+1,D) + (S+1,S) (D+1,D) (D) + (S) 16 bits 16 bits Indicates 32 bits Indicates 16 bits Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits...

  • Page 86: Basic Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.2 Basic Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Start of logic operation (A contact op- 1/2 (*2) eration start) Start of logic negation operation (B...
  • Page 87 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Generate one cycle worth of pulses ○ at rising edge of input signal Generate one cycle worth of pulses ○...

  • Page 88: Comparison Operation Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.3 Comparison Operation Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Continuity state when (S1) = (S2) S1 S2 Non-continuity state when (S1) ≠...
  • Page 89 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Continuity state when (S1) > (S2) LD> >...
  • Page 90 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Continuity state when (S1) < (S2) LD< <...
  • Page 91 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List (*1) One step is added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number. (*2) Three steps are added when either S1 or S2 is a constant number. (*3) When S, or S1 and S2 are character string constants, the number of steps varies depending on the number of charac- ters.

  • Page 92: Arithmetic Operation Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion (D)+(S) -> (D) (BIN) 16 bits 3/4 (*1)
  • Page 93 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion (S1) + (S2) -> (D) S2 D (BCD) S2 D (S1) - (S2) ->...
  • Page 94 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion 3/4 (*4) 5/6 (*4) S2 D (S1+1,S1) × (S2+1,S2) -> (D+1,D) 3/4 (*4) 5/6 (*4) S2 D Single...
  • Page 95 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List (*1) One step is added when any of the following cases apply.  When any of S1, S2, or D is a bit device and the device number is other than multiples of 16 ...

  • Page 96: Data Conversion Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.5 Data Conversion Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion 2/3 (*1) 〇 BCD conversion (D)       ...
  • Page 97 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Floating- ECON 3/4 (*7) 4/5 (*7) 〇 ECON point single Conversion to...
  • Page 98 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List (*1) One step is added when any of the following cases apply.  When either S or D is a bit device and the device number is other than multiples of 16 ...

  • Page 99: Data Transmission Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.6 Data Transmission Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion 2/3 (*1) 〇 16 bits (S)                       (D)         ...
  • Page 100 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List (*1) When either S or D is a bit device and the device number is other than multiples of 16, it will be three steps. When either S or D is a bit device using an index modification, it will be three steps.

  • Page 101: Program Branch Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.7 Program Branch Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Jumps to Pn upon establishment of input condition Jumps to Pn unconditionally Jump...

  • Page 102: Logical Operation Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.8 Logical Operation Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion WAND WAND (D) ∧ (S) → (D) WANDP WANDP 16 bits...
  • Page 103 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion WXNR WXNR (D) ∨ (S) → (D) WXNRP WXNRP 16 bits WXNR 3/4 (*5) ○...

  • Page 104: Rotation Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.9 Rotation Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion ○ SM12 RORP ○ Rotates "n"...

  • Page 105: Bit Processing Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.10 Bit Processing Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion BSET 〇 BSET BSETP 〇...

  • Page 106: Data Processing Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.11 Data Processing Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion (S2) S1 S2 D (S1) 16 bits SERP...

  • Page 107: Character String Processing Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.12 Character String Processing Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Converts 1-word BIN value designat- BINDA 〇...
  • Page 108 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Character Stores data length (number of char- 3 (*3) 4 (*4) 〇...

  • Page 109: Special Function Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.13 Special Function Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion 3/4 (*1) 4/5 (*1) 〇 Sin(S+1,S) ->...
  • Page 110 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion 3/4 (*1) 4/5 (*1) 〇 Single (S+1,S) -> (D+1,D) precision Conversion from angles to radians RADP...
  • Page 111 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion BSQR 〇 BSQR √ Integer (S) → (D) +0 16 bits Decimal BSQRP...

  • Page 112: Other Function Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.14 Other Function Instructions Counting step number Process Instruc- Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit tion sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion Carry flag Turns ON a carry flag contact (SM12) S.STC S.STC...

  • Page 113: Exclusive Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.1 Instruction List 6.1.15 Exclusive Instructions Counting step number Process Instruction Execution Refer- Category Symbol Process details unit sign condition ence Execu- Storage tion K1: Tool No. search K2: Tool No.

  • Page 114: Function List

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.2 Function List 6.2 Function List 6.2.1 How to Read Function Table The function tables have been made according to the following format. Function Argument Processing details name Outputs the sum of the input values.

  • Page 115: Type Conversion Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.2 Function List 6.2.2 Type Conversion Functions Function name Argument Process details BOOL_TO_INT(_E) (s), (d) Converts bit type data into word (signed) or double word (signed) type data. ○...

  • Page 116: Standard Functions Of One Numeric Variable

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.2 Function List Function name Argument Process details BCD_TO_STR(_E) (s), (d) Converts BCD type data into string type data. ○ TIME_TO_BOOL(_E) (s), (d) Converts time type data into bit type data. ○...

  • Page 117: Standard Comparison Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.2 Function List 6.2.7 Standard Comparison Functions Function name Argument Process details GT_E (s1), (s2), ... (s28), (d) Outputs the comparison value of the input values. ○ GE_E (s1), (s2), ...

  • Page 118: Standard Timer Function Blocks

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.2 Function List 6.2.13 Standard Timer Function Blocks Function name Argument Process details TP(_E) (s), n, (d1), (d2) Holds the signal ON for the specified time. ○ TP_HIGH(_E) TON(_E) (s), n, (d1), (d2) Turns ON the signal after the specified time.

  • Page 119: Data Designation Method

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method 6.3 Data Designation Method The following three types of data can be used in each instruction.  Bit data  Word (16-bit) data  Double-word data (32 bits) 6.3.1 Bit Data Bit data is data which handles contacts and coils, etc., in 1-bit units.

  • Page 120: Word (16 Bits) Data

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method 6.3.2 Word (16 Bits) Data Word data is a 16-bit numerical value data used with the basic instructions and applied instructions. Word devices and digit-designated bit devices can be used with the word data. ...
  • Page 121 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method When a digit is designated on the destination (D) side, the No. of points designated by the digit will be the target of the destination side.

  • Page 122: Double-Word (32 Bits) Data

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method 6.3.3 Double-Word (32 bits) Data Double word data is 32-bit numerical data used by basic instructions and application instructions. Word devices and bit devices designated by digit designation can be used as double word data. ...
  • Page 123 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method If the source side is a digit-designated bit device, and the destination is a word device, the word device on the destination side will be 0 after the digit-designated bits on the source side. Ladder example Processing With 32-bit instructions...

  • Page 124: Single/Double-Precision Real Number Data

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method 6.3.4 Single/Double-Precision Real Number Data Real number data is floating decimal point data used by basic instructions and application instructions. Only word devices are capable of storing real number data. ...
  • Page 125 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method  Double-precision real number (double-precision floating-point data) To designate devices for instructions using double-precision floating-point data, lower 16 bits will be used. Double-precision floating-point data is stored in 64 bits composed of "designated device number" and "designated device number + 3".
  • Page 126 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method  Precautions Precautions when an input value of a single/double-precision real number is set with a programming tool are shown below. [Single-precision real number] Since single-precision real number data is processed with 32-bit single-precision in a programming tool, the number of significant digits is approximately 7.
  • Page 127 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method Floating decimal point data in CPU modules can be monitored with the monitoring function of a programming tool. When floating-point data is "0", all data in the following range are turned to "0". ...

  • Page 128: Character String Data

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.3 Data Designation Method 6.3.5 Character String Data Character string data is character data used by basic instructions and application instructions. The target ranges from the designated character to the NULL code (00H) that indicates the end of the character string. In a character string process, one character corresponds to one byte and the maximum number of characters is 255.

  • Page 129: Index Modification

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.4 Index Modification 6.4 Index Modification Index modification is an indirect setting made by using an index register. When an index modification is used in a sequence program, the device to be used will be [the device number designated directly] plus [the contents of the index register].
  • Page 130 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.4 Index Modification The ladder example with modification and actual processing devices are shown below. [When Z0 = 20, Z1 = -5] Ladder example Actual processing device MOV K20 MOV K-5 MOV K100Z0 W53Z1 MOV K20...
  • Page 131 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.4 Index Modification Restrictions of modification Index modification has following restrictions  Invalid devices for modification Devices in following table are invalid for modification. Device Description 32-bit constant (16-bit constant is available for modification) (*1) Bit designation of word device □...

  • Page 132: Arithmetic Error

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.5 Arithmetic Error 6.5 Arithmetic Error An arithmetic error occurs in the following cases during executing a basic instruction or function instruction.  In the case where an error described in each instruction's explanation page has occurred: ...

  • Page 133: Execution Condition Of Instruction

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.6 Execution Condition of Instruction 6.6 Execution Condition of Instruction There are the following 4 kinds of execution conditions for basic instruction and function instruction.  Execute all the time: Instruction executed regardless of device's ON/ OFF Example: LD X0 , OUT Y10 ...

  • Page 134: Counting Step Number

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.7 Counting Step Number 6.7 Counting Step Number There are following two kinds of step numbers. Refer to "2.8 Storing PLC Processing Program and Execution Mode" for details on the sequence program storage and execution. The number of steps at storage and execution for each instruction is shown in "6.1 Instruction List".
  • Page 135 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.7 Counting Step Number Number of steps during storage This is the number of steps to be consumed when each instruction is stored in built-in ROM. This is stored in the instruction code format which is compatible with the MELSEC universal model QCPU sequencer.

  • Page 136: Operations When The Out, Set/Rst, Or Pls/Plf Instruction Of The Same Device Is Used

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.8 Operations When the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the Same Device is Used 6.8 Operations When the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the Same Device is Used Operations when multiple OUT instructions, SET/RST instructions or PLS/PLF instructions using the same device are executed in one scan are explained.
  • Page 137 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.8 Operations When the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the Same Device is Used When the SET/RST instruction of the same device is used  The SET instruction turns a specified device ON when the SET command is ON and it does not operate when the SET command is OFF.
  • Page 138 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.8 Operations When the OUT, SET/RST, or PLS/PLF Instruction of the Same Device is Used When the PLS/PLF instruction of the same device is used The PLS instruction turns a specified device ON when the PLS command changes from OFF to ON, and it turns a specified device OFF when the PLS command changes in a way other than "from OFF to ON"...

  • Page 139: Pls/Plf Instruction Behavior In The State From Plc Stop To Run

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.9 PLS/PLF Instruction Behavior in the State from PLC STOP to RUN 6.9 PLS/PLF Instruction Behavior in the State from PLC STOP to RUN PLS instruction turns ON a specified device for one scan when PLS command changes from OFF to ON, and it turns OFF the specified device in other cases ("OFF to OFF", "ON to ON, or "ON to OFF").
  • Page 140 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.9 PLS/PLF Instruction Behavior in the State from PLC STOP to RUN Behaviors while "#6456/bit2" (PLS/PLF instruction holding PLC in STOP state valid) is set to "1" This behaves in the same manner as the M7 Series. Hold "previous scan state of PLS/PLF instruction"...

  • Page 141: How To Read Instruction Tables

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 6 Explanation of Instructions and Functions 6.10 How to Read Instruction Tables 6.10 How to Read Instruction Tables The basic instructions and function instructions are explained as follows. Instruction symbol is displayed Outline of instruction is displayed BIN32-bit addition and subtraction (Storage destination device independent type) D+, D+P, D-, D-P Usable device...

  • Page 142: Basic Instructions

    Basic Instructions IB-1501667-B...
  • Page 143 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions Basic instructions include instructions to describe relay control ladders, etc. They are divided into the following categories. Instruction Meaning Contact instruction Operation start, series connection, parallel connection Connection instruction Ladder block connection, creation of pulses from operation results, store/read operation results Output instruction Bit device output, pulse output, output reversal...

  • Page 144: Contact Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.1 Contact Instructions 7.1 Contact Instructions LD, LDI (Operation start) AND, ANI (Series connection) OR, ORI (Parallel connection) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB...
  • Page 145 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.1 Contact Instructions  Functions LD,LDI  LD is the A contact operation start instruction, and LDI is the B contact operation start instruction.They read ON/OFF infor- mation from the designated device (if a word device bit has been designated, this becomes the 1/0 status of the designated bit), and use that as an operation result.
  • Page 146 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.1 Contact Instructions  Program example  A program using LD, AND,OR, and ORI instructions. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device D0.5 D0.5  A program linking contact points established through the use of ANB and ORB instructions. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...

  • Page 147: Connection Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions ANB, ORB: Ladder block series connections and parallel connections Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD Instruction symbol...
  • Page 148 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions  Arithmetic errors  There are no arithmetic errors with ANB or ORB instructions.  Program example  A program using ANB and ORB instructions [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst.
  • Page 149 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF: Pulse operation start, pulse series connection, pulse parallel con- nection Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion...
  • Page 150 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions ANDP,ANDF  ANDP is a rising edge pulse series connection instruction, and ANDF is a falling edge pulse series connection instruction. They perform an AND operation with the operation result to that point, and take the resulting value as the operation result. The ON/OFF data used by ANDP and ANDF are indicated in the table below: Devices designated by ANDP Devices designated by ANDF...
  • Page 151 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions INV: Operation results inversion Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD [Instruction symbol] [Execution condition] ...
  • Page 152 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions MEP, MEF: Operation result pulse conversion Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD [Instruction symbol] [Execution condition] ...
  • Page 153 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions EGP, EGF: Pulse conversion of edge relay operation results Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 154 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions  Arithmetic errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the EGP or EGF instructions.  Program example  Program which uses EGF instruction in sub routine program. [Ladder mode] [List mode] SM400...
  • Page 155 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions MPS, MRD, MPP: Store, read and clear of operation result Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD [Instruction symbol] [Execution condition] MPS, MRD, and MPP are not displayed as a part of the ladder display.
  • Page 156 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.2 Connection Instructions  Arithmetic errors  There are no errors associated with the MPS, MRD, or MPP instructions.  Program example  A program using the MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...

  • Page 157: Output Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions OUT(Y, M, L, F, B, SB, SM): Out instructions (Y, M, L, F, B, SB, SM) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 158 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions  Program example  When using bit devices [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device  When bit designation has been made for word device [Ladder mode] [List mode] D0.5 Steps Inst.
  • Page 159 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions OUT (T, ST), OUTH (T): 100 ms, 10 ms timer output Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 160 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions  Functions  When the operation results up to the OUT instruction are ON, the timer coil goes ON and the timer counts up to the value that has been set; when the time up state (total numeric value is equal to or greater than the setting value), the contact responds as follows: A contact Continuity...
  • Page 161 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions  Program example  The following program turns Y10 and Y14 ON 10 seconds after X0 has gone ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] K100 Steps Inst. Device K100 ...
  • Page 162 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions OUT (C): Counters Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○ Setting ○...
  • Page 163 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions  Arithmetic errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the "OUT C □ " instruction.  Program example  The following program turns Y30 ON after X0 has gone ON 10 times, and resets the counter when X1 goes ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 164 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions SET: Setting devices (ON) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 165 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions  Program example  When X8 is turned ON, Y8B is set (turned ON); when X9 is turned ON, Y8B is reset (turned OFF). [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst.
  • Page 166 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions RST: Resetting devices Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○ ○...
  • Page 167 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions  Program example  Reset of 100 ms retentive timer and counter is executed. [Ladder mode] When ST60 is set for the retentive timer,ST60 K18000 is turned ON when X4's ON time reaches 30 ST60 minutes.
  • Page 168 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions PLS, PLF: Pulse (1 scan ON) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 169 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions  When PLF instruction is changed from ON to OFF, the designated device is turned 1 scan ON. For the other cases (OFF - > OFF,OFF -> ON,ON -> ON), the designated device is turned OFF. X5 OFF M0 OFF 1 scan...
  • Page 170 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.3 Output Instructions FF: Reversing the operation result Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...

  • Page 171: Shift Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.4 Shift Instructions 7.4 Shift Instructions SFT, SFTP: Device shift Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 172 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.4 Shift Instructions [When word device bit designation is used]  Shifts to a bit in the device designated by (D) the 1/0 status of the bit immediately prior to the one designated, and turns the prior bit to 0.

  • Page 173: Master Control Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.5 Master Control Instructions 7.5 Master Control Instructions MC, MCR: Setting and resetting the master control Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Level designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD...
  • Page 174 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.5 Master Control Instructions  If the ON/OFF command of the MC instruction is ON when master control is commenced, the operation result between the MC instruction and MCR instruction will be exactly as the instruction (ladder) shows. If the MC ON/OFF instruction is OFF, the operation result between MC and MCR instructions will be as follows: Device Device status...
  • Page 175 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.5 Master Control Instructions  Program example  The master control instruction can be used in nesting. The different master control regions are distinguished by nesting (N). Nesting can be used from N0 through N7. The use of nesting enables the creation of ladders which successively limit the execution condition of the program.

  • Page 176: Other Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.6 Other Instructions 7.6 Other Instructions NOP, NOPLF, PAGE n: No operation Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit device Word device Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 177 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.6 Other Instructions PAGE n  Since this is the instruction that does not involve processing, it has no effect on the operations up to that point.  Programs after PAGEn instruction are controlled as 0 step and after of the specified n-th page. (Peripheral device display, printers, etc.) ...
  • Page 178 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.6 Other Instructions [NOPLF] [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device MOV K1 D30 NOPLF NOPLF NOPLF MOV K2 D40 NOPLF Printing the ladder will result in the following: X000 NOPLF Page change forced when NOPLF is inserted between two ladder blocks.
  • Page 179 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 7 Basic Instructions 7.6 Other Instructions IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 180: Function Instructions

    Function Instructions IB-1501667-B...
  • Page 181 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions The function instruction includes the following types. Instruction Meaning Comparison operation instruction Compare data to data Arithmetic operation instructions Adds, subtracts, multiplies, divides, increments, or decrements data with other data Data conversion instructions Coverts data types Data transfer instructions Transmits designated data...

  • Page 182: Comparison Operation Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions =, <>, >, <=, <, >=: 16-bit data comparison Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V...
  • Page 183 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions  Program example  The following program compares the data at X0 to XF with the data at D3, and turns Y33 ON if the data is identical. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 184 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions D=, D<>, D>, D>=, D<, D>=: 32-bit data comparison Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 185 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions  Program example  The following program compares the data at X0 to X1F with the data at D3 and D4, and turns Y33 ON if the data is identi- cal.
  • Page 186 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions E=, E<>, E>, E<=, E<, E>= : Floating-point data comparison (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD...
  • Page 187 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is not within the following range. (Error code: 35) -126 0, 2 ≤...
  • Page 188 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions ED=, ED<>, ED>, ED<=, ED<, ED>=: Floating-point data comparison (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 189 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions  Program example  The following program compares the 64-bit floating-point real number data at D0 to D3 to the 64-bit floating-point real num- ber data at D4 and D7. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 190 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions Note  Since the the maximum number of digits for real numbers that can be input by programing tool is 15 digits, the comparison with real numbers whose number of significant digits is 16 or more cannot be made by the instruction shown in this section. When judging match/mismatch with real numbers whose significant digits is 16 or more by the instruction in this section, compare it with the approximate values of the real number to be compared and judge by the sizes.
  • Page 191 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions $=, $<>, $>, $<=, $<, $>=: Character string data comparison Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 192 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions  When all character strings match, the comparison result will show the sets of data match. Instruction sym- Comparison oper- ation result bol in Continuity b8b7 b8b7 $<>...
  • Page 193 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.1 Comparison Operation Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The NULL code "00H" does not exist in the relevant device range starting from the device number designated in S1 or (Error code: 82) - The character string of S1 or S2 is longer than 255 characters.

  • Page 194: Arithmetic Operation Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions +, +P, -, -P: BIN 16-bit addition and subtraction operations (Device at storage destination: Independent type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa-...
  • Page 195 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Subtracts 16-bit BIN data designated by (S1) from 16-bit BIN data designated by (S2) and stores the result of the subtrac- tion at the device designated by (D). 5678 (BIN) 1234 (BIN) 4444 (BIN)
  • Page 196 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions +, +P, -, -P: BIN 16-bit addition and subtraction operations (Device at storage destination: Shared type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant...
  • Page 197 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Subtracts 16-bit BIN data designated by (D) from 16-bit BIN data designated by (S) and stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D). 5678 (BIN) 1234 (BIN) 4444 (BIN)
  • Page 198 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions D+, D+P, D-, D-P: BIN 32-bit addition and subtraction operations (Device at storage destination: Indepen- dent type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data...
  • Page 199 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Subtracts 32-bit BIN data designated by (S1) from 32-bit BIN data designated by (S2), and stores the result of the subtrac- tion at the device designated by (D). S1+1 S2+1 567890 (BIN)
  • Page 200 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions D+, D+P, D-, D-P: BIN 32-bit addition and subtraction operations (Device at storage destination: Shared type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant...
  • Page 201 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Subtracts 32-bit data designated by (D) from 32-bit data designated by (S) and stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D). 567890 (BIN) 123456 (BIN) 444434 (BIN) ...
  • Page 202 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions *, *P, /, /P: BIN 16-bit multiplication and division operations Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD △...
  • Page 203 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Divides BIN 16-bit data designated by (S1) and BIN 16-bit data designated by (S2), and stores the division result in the device designated by (D). Quotient Remainder 5678 (BIN) 1234 (BIN)
  • Page 204 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Program example  When X5 is turned ON, "5678" of BIN and multiplication result of D0 are stored in D3 and D4. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst.
  • Page 205 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions D*, D*P, D/, D/P: BIN 32-bit multiplication and division operations Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 206 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Divides BIN bit data designated by (S1) and BIN bit data designated by (S2), and stores the division result in the device designated by (D). S1+1 S2+1 567890 (BIN) 123456 (BIN)
  • Page 207 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions B+, B+P, B-, B-P: BCD 4-digit addition and subtraction operations Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 208 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Subtracts the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S1" and the BCD 4-digit data designated by "S2", and stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by "D". Digits higher than those which were ...
  • Page 209 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions B*, B*P, B/, B/P: BCD 4-digit multiplication and division operations Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD △...
  • Page 210 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Division result (quotient and remainder) is stored by using 32 bits. Quotient (BCD 4-digit): Stored at the lower 16 bits Remainder (BCD 4-digit): Stored at the upper 16 bits ...
  • Page 211 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions E+, E+P, E-, E-P: Floating-point data addition and subtraction operations (single precision) (Device at storage destination: Independent type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 212 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Subtracts the 32-bit floating-point real number data designated by (S2) from the 32-bit floating-point real number data des- ignated by (S1) and stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D). S1+1 S2+1 32-bit floating-point real...
  • Page 213 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions E+, E+P, E-, E-P: Floating-point data addition and subtraction operations (single precision) (Device at storage destination: Shared type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 214 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Subtracts the 32-bit floating-point real number designated by (S) from the 32-bit floating-point real number designated by (D) and stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D). 32-bit floating-point real 32-bit floating-point real 32-bit floating-point real...
  • Page 215 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions ED+, ED+P, ED-, ED-P: Floating-point data addition and subtraction operations (double precision) (De- vice at storage destination: Independent type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 216 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Subtracts the 64-bit floating-point real number designated by (S2) from the 64-bit floating-point real number designated by (S1) and stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D). S1+3 S1+2 S1+1 S1 S2+3 S2+2 S2+1 S2 D+3 D+2 D+1 D...
  • Page 217 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Program example  The following program adds the 64-bit floating-point real number at D3 to D6 to the 64-bit floating-point real number at D10 to D13 when X20 turns ON, and stores the result of the addition at R0 to R3. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 218 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions ED+, ED+P, ED-, ED-P: Floating-point data addition and subtraction operations (double precision) (De- vice at storage destination: Shared type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 219 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Subtracts the 64-bit floating-point real number designated by (S) from the 64-bit floating-point real number designated by (D) and stores the result of the subtraction at the device designated by (D). D+3 D+2 D+1 S+3 S+2 S+1 D+3 D+2...
  • Page 220 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions E*, E*P E/, E/P: Floating-point data multiplication and division operations (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD...
  • Page 221 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Divides the 32-bit floating-point real number designated by (S1) by the 32-bit floating-point real number designated by (S2) and stores the result of the division at the device designated by (D). S1+1 S2+1 32-bit floating-point real...
  • Page 222 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions ED*, ED*P ED/, ED/P: Floating-point data multiplication and division operations (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD...
  • Page 223 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Divides the 64-bit floating-point real number designated by (S1) by the 64-bit floating-point real number designated by (S2) and stores the result of the division at the device designated by (D). S1+3 S1+2 S1+1 S1 S2+3 S2+2 S2+1 S2 D+3 D+2 D+1 D...
  • Page 224 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Program example  The following program multiplies the 64-bit floating-point real number at D3 to D6 by the 64-bit floating-point real number at D10 to D13 when X20 turns ON, and stores the result of the multiplication at R0 to R3. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 225 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions INC, INCP, DEC, DECP: Incrementing and decrementing 16-bit BIN data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 226 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Program example  The following is a down counter program. [Ladder mode] Transfers the value of 100 to D8 when X7 is MOVP K100 D8 When M38 is OFF, X8 goes from OFF to ON, and 1 is decremented from D8.
  • Page 227 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions DINC, DINCP, DDEC, DDECP: Incrementing and decrementing 32-bit BIN data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD T SM V...
  • Page 228 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Program example  The following program adds 1 to the data at D0 and D1 when X0 is ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device DINCP DINCP ...
  • Page 229 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions NEG, NEGP, DNEG, DNEGP: Complement of 2 of BIN 16-bit data and BIN 32-bit data (sign reversal) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data...
  • Page 230 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions DNEG  Reverses the sign of the 32-bit device designated by "D" and stores at the device designated by "D". 32 Bit -218460 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Before execution 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...
  • Page 231 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions $+, $+P: Character string link (Device at storage destination: Independent type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 232 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - There are not enough points from the device number designated by (D) to the last device number of the relevant device to store all the linked character strings.
  • Page 233 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions $+, $+P: Character string link (Device at storage destination: Shared type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 234 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.2 Arithmetic Operation Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - There are not enough points from the device number designated by (D) to the last device number of the relevant device to store all the linked character strings.

  • Page 235: Data Conversion Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions BCD, BCDP, DBCD, DBCDP: Conversion from BIN data to 4-digit and 8-digit BCD Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data...
  • Page 236 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The data at S was not in the 0 to 9999 range when the BCD instruction was issued. (Error code: 80) - The data at "S"+1 and "S"...
  • Page 237 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions BIN, BINP, DBIN, DBINP: Conversion from BCD 4-digit and 8-digit data to BIN data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB...
  • Page 238 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - When values other than 0 to 9 are designated to any digits of "S". (Error code: 81) ...
  • Page 239 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP: Conversion from BIN data to floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V...
  • Page 240 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions  Functions  Converts BIN 16-bit data designated by (S) to a 32-bit floating-point real number, and stores the result at the device number designated by (D). BIN 16 bits 32-bit floating-point real number...
  • Page 241 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions  Program example  The following program converts the BIN 16-bit data at D20 to a 32-bit floating-point real number, and stores the result at D0 and D1. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 242 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions FLTD, FLTDP, DFLTD, DFLTDP: Conversion from BIN data to floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V...
  • Page 243 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions  Program example  The following program converts the BIN 16-bit data at D20 to a 64-bit floating-point real number, and stores the result at D0 to D3. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 244 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions INT, INTP, DINT, DINTP: Conversion from floating-point data to BIN data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V...
  • Page 245 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions DINT  Converts the 32-bit floating-point real number designated by (S) to BIN 32-bit data, and stores the result at the device num- ber designated by (D). Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits 32-bit floating-point real BIN 32 bits...
  • Page 246 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions  Program example  The following program converts the 32-bit floating-point real number at D20 and D21 to BIN 16-bit data, and stores the result at D0. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 247 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions INTD, INTDP, DINTD, DINTDP: Conversion from floating-point data to BIN data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V...
  • Page 248 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions DINTD  Converts the 64-bit floating-point real number designated by (S) to BIN 32-bit data, and stores the result at the device num- ber designated by (D). Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits 64-bit floating-point real BIN 32 bits...
  • Page 249 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions  Program example  The following program converts the 64-bit floating-point real number at D20 to D23 to BIN 16-bit data, and stores the result at D0. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 250 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions ECON, ECONP: Conversion from single precision to double precision Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 251 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions EDCON, EDCONP: Conversion from double precision to single precision Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 252 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.3 Data Conversion Instructions  Program example  The following program converts the 64-bit floating-point real number at D10 to D13 to a 32-bit floating-point real number when X0 turns ON, and stores the result of the conversion at D0 to D1. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...

  • Page 253: Data Transfer Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions MOV, MOVP, DMOV, DMOVP: 16-bit and 32-bit data transfers Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V...
  • Page 254 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions  Program example  The following program stores input data from X0 to XB at D8. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device MOV K3X0 D8 K3X0 ...
  • Page 255 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions CML, CMLP, DCML, DCMLP: 16-bit and 32-bit negation transfers Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 256 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions  Program example  The following program inverts the data from X0 to X7, and transfers result to D0. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device CML K2X0 D0 K2X0 When the number of bits at "S"...
  • Page 257 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions XCH, XCHP, DXCH, DXCHP: 16-bit and 32-bit data exchanges Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 258 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions  Program example  The following program exchanges the present value of T0 with the contents of D0 when X8 goes ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst.
  • Page 259 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions BMOV, BMOVP: 16-bit data block transfers Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 260 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions - Transferring to a larger device No. results in abnormal operation. (Example) When BMOV D5 D0 K10 are executed Abnormal transfer Duplicated device  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - In the case where a part of device area between S/D and n-th device does not exist.
  • Page 261 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions FMOV, FMOVP: 16-bit identical data batch transfer Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 262 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions  Program example  The following program resets (clears) the data at D8 to D23 when XA turns ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device FMOV K0 D8 H10 FMOV 16 blocks Transfer...
  • Page 263 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions S.TMOV: Transfer of timer and counter setting value Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 264 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions  Program example  The setting value of T10 is transferred to D0. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device T10 K10 S.TMOV T10 D0 S.TMOV In this example, D0 equals to 10. ...
  • Page 265 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions EMOV, EMOVP: Floating-point data transfer (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 266 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions  Program example  The following program stores the real number from D10 and D11 at D0 and D1. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device SM400 SM400 EMOVP EMOVP D10 D0...
  • Page 267 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions EDMOV, EDMOVP: Floating-point data transfer (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 268 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions  Program example  The following program stores the 64-bit floating-point real number at D10 to D13 to D0 to D3. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device SM400 SM400...
  • Page 269 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions $MOV, $MOVP: Character string transfer Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 270 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions  Processing will be performed without error even in cases where the range for the devices storing the character string data to be transferred ((S) to (S+n)) overlaps with the range of the devices which will store the character string data after it has been transferred ((D) to (D+n)).
  • Page 271 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.4 Data Transfer Instructions  Program example  The following program transfers the character string data stored in D10 to D12 to D20 to D22 when X0 turns ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst.

  • Page 272: Program Branch Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions CJ, JMP: Conditional jump Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 273 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions  A program of specified pointer No. in the same program file is executed unconditionally. POINT Note the following points when using the jump instruction. (1) Jump instructions can be used only for pointer numbers within the same program file. (2) After the timer coil has gone ON, accurate measurements cannot be made if there is an attempt to jump the timer of a coil that has been turned ON using the CJ or JMP instructions.
  • Page 274 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions  Program example  The following program jumps to P3 when X9 goes ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst. Device CJ P3 IB-1501667-B...
  • Page 275 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions FEND: Program termination Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD [Instruction symbol] [Execution condition] FEND FEND...
  • Page 276 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions  Program example  The following program uses the CJ instruction. [Ladder mode] When XB is ON, jumps to label P23; from P23, executes the next step Executed when XB is OFF Indicates the termination of the sequence CJ P23...
  • Page 277 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions GOEND: Jump to END Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD [Instruction symbol] [Execution condition] Command GOEND...
  • Page 278 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions CALL, CALLP, RET: Sub-routine program calls and return from sub-routine programs Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 279 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - Following the execution of the CALL(P) instruction, an END or FEND instruction is executed before the execution of the RET instruction.
  • Page 280 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions FOR, NEXT: FOR to NEXT instruction loop Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 281 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - An END (FEND) instruction is executed after the execution of a FOR instruction, but before the execution of a NEXT instruction.
  • Page 282 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions BREAK, BREAKP: Forced end of FOR to NEXT instruction loop Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 283 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.5 Program Branch Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The BREAK instruction is used in a case other than with the FOR to NEXT instruction loop. (Error code: 32) - The jump destination for the pointer designated by Pn does not exist.

  • Page 284: Logical Operation Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions WAND, WANDP, DAND, DANDP: Logical products with 16-bit and 32-bit data (Device at storage destina- tion: Independent type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer...
  • Page 285 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions DAND  Conducts a logical product operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S1" and the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results in the device designated by "D". 32 Bit S1+1 1 1 1 1...
  • Page 286 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions WAND, WANDP, DAND, DANDP: Logical products with 16-bit and 32-bit data (Device at storage destina- tion: Shared type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 287 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the WAND(P) or DAND(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program masks the digit in the 10s place of the BCD 4-digit value at D10 (second digit from the end) to 0 when XA turns ON.
  • Page 288 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions  The following program performs a logical product operation on the data at D99 and D100, and the 24- bit data between X30 and X47 when X8 is ON, and stores the results at D99 and D100. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 289 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions WOR, WORP, DOR, DORP: Logical sums of 16-bit and 32-bit data (Device at storage destination: Inde- pendent type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 290 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions  Conducts a logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S1" and the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results in the device designated by "D". 32 Bit S1+1 1 1 1 1...
  • Page 291 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions WOR, WORP, DOR, DORP: Logical sums of 16-bit and 32-bit data (Device at storage destination: Shared type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data...
  • Page 292 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the WOR(P) or DOR(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program performs a logical sum operation on the data at D10 and D20 when XA goes ON, and stores the results at D10.
  • Page 293 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions WXOR, WXORP, DXOR, DXORP: 16-bit and 32-bit exclusive OR operations (Device at storage destina- tion: Independent type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data...
  • Page 294 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions DXOR  Conducts an exclusive OR operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S1" and the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results in the device designated by "D". 32 Bit S1+1 0 1 0 1...
  • Page 295 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions WXOR, WXORP, DXOR, DXORP: 16-bit and 32-bit exclusive OR operations (Device at storage destina- tion: Shared type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data...
  • Page 296 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the WXOR(P) or DXOR(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program performs an exclusive OR operation on the data at D10 and D20 when XA is ON, and stores the result at D10.
  • Page 297 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions WXNR, WXNRP, DXNR, DXNRP: 16-bit and 32-bit data non-exclusive logical sum operations (Device at storage destination: Independent type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 298 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions DXNR  Conducts a non-exclusive logical sum operation on each bit of the 32-bit data of the device designated by "S1" and the 32- bit data of the device designated by "S2", and stores the results in the device designated by "D". 32 bit S1+1 0 1 0 1...
  • Page 299 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions WXNR, WXNRP, DXNR, DXNRP: 16-bit and 32-bit data non-exclusive logical sum operations (Device at storage destination: Shared type) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 300 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.6 Logical Operation Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the WXNR(P) or DXNR(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program performs a non-exclusive OR operation on the data at D10 and D20 when XA is ON, and stores the result at D10.

  • Page 301: Rotation Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions ROR, RORP, RCR, RCRP: Right rotation of 16-bit data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 302 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the ROR(P) or RCR(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program rotates the contents of D0, though not including the carry flag, 3 bits to the right when XC is ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 303 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions ROL, ROLP, RCL, RCLP: Left rotation of 16-bit data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 304 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the ROL(P) or RCL(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program rotates the contents of D0, not including the carry flag, 3 bits to the left when XC is ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 305 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions DROR, DRORP, DRCR, DRCRP: Right rotation of 32-bit data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 306 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with DROR(P) or DRCR(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, not including the carry flag, 4 bits to the right when XC is ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 307 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions DROL, DROLP, DRCL, DRCLP: Left rotation of 32-bit data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 308 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the DROL(P) or DRCL(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program rotates the contents of D0 and D1, not including the carry flag, 4 bits to the left when XC is ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 309 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions SFR, SFRP, SFL, SFLP: n-bit shift to right or left of 16-bit data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD...
  • Page 310 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions  Shifts 16-bit data at device designated by "D" n-bits to the left. b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0...
  • Page 311 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the SFR(P) or SFL(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program shifts the contents of Y10 to Y1B to the right by the number of bits designated by D0 when X20 goes [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 312 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions DSFR, DSFRP, DSFL, DSFLP: Right/Left shift of word device in batch Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 313 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.7 Rotation Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - A part of the device area between the "D" device and the nth device does not exist. (Error code: 82) ...

  • Page 314: Bit Processing Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.8 Bit Processing Instructions 8.8 Bit Processing Instructions BSET, BSETP, BRST, BRSTP: Bit set for word devices, bit reset for word devices Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index...
  • Page 315 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.8 Bit Processing Instructions BRST  Resets (sets "0" at) the nth bit in the word device designated by (D).  If n exceeds "15", bit set/reset is executed with the lower 4 bits of the data. BRSTP b1b0 Before execution...

  • Page 316: Data Processing Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions SER, SERP, DSER, DSERP: 16-bit and 32-bit data searches Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V...
  • Page 317 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions  Functions  Takes the 16-bit data of the device designated at "S1" as the entry code to search for n number of blocks from the 16-bit data from the device designated at "S2".
  • Page 318 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - When the area of n number of blocks from the device designated at "S2" does not exist. (Error code: 82) ...
  • Page 319 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions SUM, SUMP, DSUM, DSUMP: 16-bit and 32-bit data bit check Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 320 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions  Operation errors  There are no arithmetic errors associated with the SUM(P) or DSUM(P) instructions.  Program example  The following program stores the number of bits from X8 to X17 which are ON when X10 is ON at D0. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 321 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions SEG, SEGP: 7-segment decode Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 322 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions  7-segment decode display Configuration of 7 Seg- Display Data ments Bit Pattern B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000...
  • Page 323 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions  Program example  The following program converts the data from XC to XF when X0 is ON to 7-segment display data and outputs it to Y38 to Y3F.
  • Page 324 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions DECO, DECOP: Decoding from 8 bits to 256 bits Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 325 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions  Program example  The following program decodes 3 bits of R20 bit0 to 3 when X20 turns ON and turns D100 corresponding bit to ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst.
  • Page 326 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions ENCO, ENCOP: Encoding from 256 bits to 8 bits Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 327 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions  Program example  The following program encodes the 3 bits from M10 when X20 is ON, and stores the results at D8. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst.
  • Page 328 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions S.AVE: Average value calculation Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 329 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.9 Data Processing Instructions  Program example  In this program the average of D882 to D888 is calculated when XB turns ON, and the result is output to D0. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst.

  • Page 330: Character String Processing Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions BINDA, BINDAP, DBINDA, DBINDAP: Conversion from BIN 16-bit data to decimal ASCII, conversion from BIN 32-bit data to decimal ASCII Usable devices Digit Setting Con-...
  • Page 331 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Functions BINDA  Converts each of the individual digit values of the BIN 16-bit data designated by (S) expressed as decimal into ASCII codes, and stores the result in the area starting from the device number designated by (D). b8b7 ASCII code for ten- Sign...
  • Page 332 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions DBINDA  Converts each of the individual digit values of the BIN 32-bit data designated by (S) expressed as decimal into ASCII codes, and stores the result in the area starting from the device number designated by (D). b8b7 ASCII code for billions Sign...
  • Page 333 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The range of the device designated by (D) exceeds the relevant device range.
  • Page 334 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions BINHA, BINHAP, DBINHA, DBINHAP: Conversion from BIN 16-bit data to hexadecimal ASCII, conversion from BIN 32-bit data to hexadecimal ASCII Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa-...
  • Page 335 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions DBINHA  Converts each of the individual digit values of the BIN 32-bit data designated by (S) expressed as hexadecimal into ASCII codes, and stores the result in the area starting from the device number designated by (D). b8b7 ASCII code for the 7th digit ASCII code for the 8th digit...
  • Page 336 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The range of the device designated by (D) exceeds the relevant device range.
  • Page 337 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions BCDDA, BCDDAP, DBCDDA, DBCDDAP: Conversion from BCD 4-digit data to decimal ASCII, conversion from BCD 8-digit data to decimal ASCII Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa-...
  • Page 338 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Functions BCDDA  Converts each of the individual digit values of the BCD 4-digit data designated by (S) into ASCII codes, and stores the result in the area starting from the device number designated by (D). b8b7 b15 b12b11 b8b7 b4b3...
  • Page 339 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions DBCDDA  Converts each of the individual digit values of the BCD 8-digit data designated by (S) into ASCII codes, and stores the result in the area starting from the device number designated by (D). b8b7 ASCII code for millions ASCII code for ten-millions...
  • Page 340 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - When BCDDA instruction is used, the data designated by (S) is out of range of 0 to 9999.
  • Page 341 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions DABIN, DABINP, DDABIN, DDABINP: Conversion from decimal ASCII to BIN 16-bit data, conversion from decimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa-...
  • Page 342 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Functions DABIN  Converts decimal ASCII data stored in the area starting from the device number designated by (S) to BIN 16-bit data, and stores the result at the device number designated by (D). b8b7 ASCII code for ten-thou- Sign data...
  • Page 343 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions DDABIN  Converts decimal ASCII data stored in the area starting from the device number designated by (S) to BIN 32-bit data, and stores the result at the device number designated by (D). b8b7 ASCII code for billions Sign data...
  • Page 344 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The ASCII code of each position designated by (S) to (S+5) is a value other than "30H"...
  • Page 345 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions HABIN, HABINP, DHABIN, DHABINP: Conversion from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 16-bit data, conversion from hexadecimal ASCII to BIN 32-bit data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa-...
  • Page 346 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Functions HABIN  Converts hexadecimal ASCII data stored in the area starting from the device number designated by (S) to BIN 16-bit data, and stores the result at the device number designated by (D). b8b7 ASCII code for the 3rd digit ASCII code for the 4th digit...
  • Page 347 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The ASCII code of each position designated by (S) to (S+3) is a value other than "30H"...
  • Page 348 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions DABCD, DABCDP, DDABCD, DDABCDP: Conversion from decimal ASCII to BCD 4-digit data, conversion from decimal ASCII to BCD 8-digit data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa-...
  • Page 349 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Functions DABCD  Converts decimal ASCII data stored in the area starting from the device number designated by (S) to BCD 4-digit data, and stores the result at the device number designated by (D). b8b7 b12b11 b8b7 b4b3...
  • Page 350 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - A character other than "0"...
  • Page 351 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions LEN, LENP: Character string length detection Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 352 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The NULL code "00H"...
  • Page 353 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions ESTR, ESTRP: Conversion from floating-point data to character string data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 354 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions [When using decimal format] Decimal point format Total number of digits S2+1 b8b7 Number of digits in ASCII code for the (total ASCII code for the sign S2+2 decimal fraction number of digits -1)th...
  • Page 355 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  The converted character string data is stored at the area starting from the device number (D) as indicated below: - The sign "20H" (space) will be stored if the 32-bit floating-point real number data is positive, and the sign "2DH" (-) will be stored if the 32-bit floating-point real number data is negative.
  • Page 356 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions [When using exponential format] Exponential Total number of S2+1 b8b7 Number of digits in ASCII code for the S2+2 ASCII code for the sign decimal fraction (total number of digits -1)th digit ASCII code for decimal...
  • Page 357 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  The converted character string data is stored at the area starting from the device number (D) as indicated below: - "20H" (space) will be stored in the sign for the integer if the 32-bit floating-point real number data is positive, and "2DH" (-) will be stored in the sign for the integer if the 32-bit floating-point real number data is negative.
  • Page 358 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions - If the total digits of the integer part and the decimal fraction part is 7 digits or more, the 7th digit will be rounded off and "30H"...
  • Page 359 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Program example  The following program converts the 32-bit floating-point real number data stored at R0 and R1 in accordance with the con- version designation stored at R10 to R12, and stores the result in the area starting from D0 when X0 turns ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 360 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions EVAL, EVALP: Conversion from character string to floating-point data Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 361 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Functions EVAL  Converts character string stored in the area starting from the device number designated by (S) to a 32-bit floating-point real number, and stores result at the device number designated by (D). ...
  • Page 362 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Converts the upper 7 digits in the integer part and decimal fraction part of the character string designated by (S) excluding the sign, decimal point, and exponent part. (As the output values are 32-bit floating-point real numbers, the number of sig- nificant digits is 6.) [When using decimal format] b8b7...
  • Page 363 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  In a case where "20H" (space) or "30H" (0) exists between numbers not including the initial zero in a character string desig- nated by (S), they will be ignored when the conversion is done. b8b7 (space) 2DH (- )
  • Page 364 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The improper data as shown below, which cannot be converted into (S), have been set.
  • Page 365 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  The following program converts the character string stored in the area starting from D10 to a 32-bit floating-point real num- ber, and stores the result at D100 and D101 when X20 turns ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 366 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions RIGHT, RIGHTP, LEFT, LEFTP: Extracting character string data from the right, extracting character string data from the left Usable devices Digit Setting Bit devices Word devices Constant Pointer designa-...
  • Page 367 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Functions RIGHT  Stores n number of characters from the right of the character string (the end of the character string) that is stored in the area starting from the device number designated by (S), in the area starting from the device number designated by (D).
  • Page 368 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions LEFT  Stores n number of characters from the left of the character string (the beginning of the character string) that is stored in the area starting from the device number designated by (S), in the area starting from the device number designated by (D). b8b7 b8b7 ASCII code for the 2nd...
  • Page 369 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The character string designated by (S) is "0"...
  • Page 370 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions MIDR, MIDRP, MIDW, MIDWP: Random selection from character strings, random replacement in charac- ter strings Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant...
  • Page 371 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  The NULL code (00H) indicating the end of the character string is automatically added to the end of the character string. For details on character string data formats, refer to "6.3.5 Character String Data". ...
  • Page 372 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  If the number of characters designated by (S2+1) exceeds the final character from the character string data designated by (D), data will be stored up to the final character. Before execution b8b7 42H (B)
  • Page 373 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. When the MIDR Instruction is used (Error code: 82) - The value of (S2) exceeds the number of characters of (S1).
  • Page 374 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.10 Character String Processing Instructions  The following program stores 4 characters of the character string data stored in the area starting from D0 into the area starting from the 3rd character from the left of the character string data in the area starting from D100 when X0 turns ON. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...

  • Page 375: Special Function Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions SIN, SINP: SIN operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V...
  • Page 376 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is "-0", unnormalized number, nonnumeric, or ± ∞ . (Error code: 35) - The operation result exceeds the following range.
  • Page 377 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions SIND, SINDP: SIN operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 378 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is not within the following range. (Error code: 35) -1022 1024 0, 2...
  • Page 379 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions COS, COSP: COS operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 380 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Program example  The following program conducts a COS operation on the angle set as BCD 4-digit from X20 to X2F and stores the result at D0 and D1 as a 32-bit floating-point real number.
  • Page 381 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions COSD, COSDP: COS operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 382 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is not within the following range. (Error code: 35) -1022 1024 0, 2...
  • Page 383 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions TAN, TANP: TAN operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 384 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is "-0", unnormalized number, nonnumeric, or ± ∞ . (Error code: 35) - The operation result exceeds the following range.
  • Page 385 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions TAND, TANDP: TAN operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 386 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is not within the following range. (Error code: 35) -1022 1024 0, 2...
  • Page 387 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions ASIN, ASINP: SIN operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 388 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The value designated by (S) is outside the range of -1.0 to 1.0. (Error code: 34) - The designated device value is not within the following range.
  • Page 389 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions ASIND, ASINDP: SIN operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 390 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The value designated by (S) is outside the range of -1.0 to 1.0. (Error code: 34) - The designated device value is not within the following range.
  • Page 391 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions ACOS, ACOSP: COS operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 392 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The value designated by (S) is outside the range of -1.0 to 1.0. (Error code: 34) - The designated device value is not within the following range.
  • Page 393 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions ACOSD, ACOSDP: COS operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 394 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The value designated by (S) is outside the range of -1.0 to 1.0. (Error code: 34) - The designated device value is not within the following range.
  • Page 395 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions ATAN, ATANP: TAN operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 396 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is not within the following range. (Error code: 35) -126 0, 2 ≤...
  • Page 397 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions ATAND, ATANDP: TAN operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 398 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is not within the following range. (Error code: 35) -1022 1024 0, 2...
  • Page 399 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions RAD, RADP: Conversion from floating-point angle to radian (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 400 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is not within the following range. (Error code: 35) -126 0, 2 ≤...
  • Page 401 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions RADD, RADDP: Conversion from floating-point angle to radian (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 402 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is not within the following range. (Error code: 35) -1022 1024 0, 2...
  • Page 403 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions DEG, DEGP: Conversion from floating-point radian to angle (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 404 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is "-0", unnormalized number, nonnumeric, or ± ∞ . (Error code: 35) - The operation result exceeds the following range.
  • Page 405 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions DEGD, DEGDP: Conversion from floating-point radian to angle (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 406 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The designated device value is not within the following range. (Error code: 35) -1022 1024 0, 2...
  • Page 407 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions POW, POWP: Exponentiation operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD △...
  • Page 408 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Functions  Raises the 32-bit floating-point real number designated by (S1) to the power of the 32-bit floating-point real number desig- nated by (S2), and stores the operation result at the device designated by (D). Exponentiation data S2+1 S1+1...
  • Page 409 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Program example  The following program raises the 32-bit floating-point real number data at D0 and D1 to the power of the 32-bit floating-point real number data at D10 and D11 when X10 turns ON, and stores the operation result at D20 and D21. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 410 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions POWD, POWDP: Exponentiation operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD △...
  • Page 411 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Functions POWD  Raises the 64-bit floating-point real number designated by (S1) to the power of the 64-bit floating-point real number desig- nated by (S2), and stores the operation result at the device designated by (D). S2+3 S2+2 S2+1 S2 Exponentiation data S1+3 S1+2 S1+1 S1...
  • Page 412 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Program example  The following program raises the 64-bit floating-point real number data at D200 to D203 to the power of the 64-bit floating- point real number data at D0 to D3 when X10 turns ON, and stores the operation result at D100 to D103. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 413 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions SQR, SQRP: Square root operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 414 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Program example  The following program seeks the square root of the value set as BCD 4-digit from X20 to X2F and stores the result at D0 and D1 as a 32-bit floating-point real number.
  • Page 415 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions SQRD, SQRDP: Square root operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 416 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The value designated by (S) is a negative number. (Error code: 34) - The designated device value is not within the following range.
  • Page 417 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions EXP, EXPP: Exponent operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 418 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Program example  The following program conducts an exponent operation on the value set as BCD 2-digit from X20 to X27 and stores the operation result at D0 and D1 as a 32-bit floating-point real number. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 419 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions EXPD, EXPDP: Exponent operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 420 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Program example  The following program conducts an exponent operation on the value set as BCD 2-digit from X20 to X31 and stores the operation result at D0 to D3 as a 64-bit floating-point real number. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 421 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions LOG, LOGP: Natural logarithm operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 422 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Program example  The following program seeks the natural logarithm of the value "10" set by D50, and stores the result at D30 and D31. [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps Inst.
  • Page 423 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions LOGD, LOGDP: Natural logarithm operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 424 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The value designated by (S) is a negative number. (Error code: 34) - The value designated by (S) is "0".
  • Page 425 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions LOG10, LOG10P: Common logarithm operation on floating-point data (single precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 426 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The value designated by (S) is a negative number. (Error code: 34) - The value designated by (S) is "0".
  • Page 427 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions LOG10D, LOG10DP: Common logarithm operation on floating-point data (double precision) Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 428 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The value designated by (S) is a negative number. (Error code: 34) - The value designated by (S) is "0".
  • Page 429 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions BSQR, BSQRP, BDSQR, BDSQRP: BCD 4-digit square roots, BCD 8-digit square roots Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD...
  • Page 430 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Functions BSQR  Returns the square root of the value designated by (S) and stores the operation result in the device number designated by (D). Decimal Integer part fraction part ...
  • Page 431 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Program example  The following program calculates the square root of the BCD value 1325, and stores the integer part at (D1) and the deci- mal fraction part at (D2). [Ladder mode] [List mode] Steps...
  • Page 432 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions BSIN, BSINP: BCD type SIN operation Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 433 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Program example  The following program calculates the SIN of the data designated as BCD 3-digit from X20 to X2B, and stores the integer part as BCD 1-digit at (D21) and the decimal fraction part as BCD 4-digit at (D22). (If the value set from X20 to X2F is greater than 360, the value will be adjusted to be within the range of 0 to 360) [Ladder mode] [List mode]...
  • Page 434 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions BCOS, BCOSP: BCD type COS operations Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 435 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The data designated by (S) is not a BCD value. (Error code: 34) - The data designated by (S) is outside the range of 0 to 360.
  • Page 436 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions BTAN, BTANP: BCD type TAN operation Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 437 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The data designated by (S) is not a BCD value. (Error code: 34) - The data designated by (S) is outside the range of 0 to 360.
  • Page 438 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions BASIN, BASINP: BCD type SIN operation Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 439 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The data designated by (S) is not a BCD value. (Error code: 34) - The data designated by (S) is outside the range of -1.0000 to 1.0000.
  • Page 440 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions BACOS, BACOSP: BCD type COS operation Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 441 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The data designated by (S) is not a BCD value. (Error code: 34) - The data designated by (S) is outside the range of -1.0000 to 1.0000.
  • Page 442 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions BATAN, BATANP: BCD type TAN operation Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD ○...
  • Page 443 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.11 Special Function Instructions  Operation errors  In the following cases, an arithmetic error occurs, the error flag (SM0) turns ON, and an error code is stored at SD0. - The data designated by (S) is not a BCD value. (Error code: 34) - The range of the device designated by (S) exceeds the relevant device range.

  • Page 444: Other Function Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.12 Other Function Instructions 8.12 Other Function Instructions S.STC, S.CLC: Carry flag set/reset Usable devices Digit Setting Con- Bit devices Word devices Pointer designa- Index data stant tion B SB T SM V R/ZR W SW SD [Instruction symbol] [Execution condition] Command...
  • Page 445 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 8 Function Instructions 8.12 Other Function Instructions  Program example  In this program, D0 data is added to D2 data when M0 turns ON. The carry flag (SM12) is turned ON if the result exceeds 32767, and turned OFF if 32767 or less.

  • Page 446: Exclusive Instructions

    Exclusive Instructions IB-1501667-B...
  • Page 447 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions PLC exclusive instruction is limited to its application for the processes which may be difficult to perform only with basic instruction or function instruction. PLC exclusive instructions include:  ATC exclusive instruction (ATC) With this instruction, ATC, such as magazine index control, tool change by arm, etc.

  • Page 448: Atc Exclusive Instruction

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.1 Outline of ATC Control The ATC (Automatic Tool Change) can be controlled in the following two ways:  Mechanical random control With the information of magazine position from the machine, and T command, the control method determines the direction of magazine rotation, number of steps, etc.

  • Page 449: Explanation Of Terminology

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.3 Explanation of Terminology [Pointer] This points out the position where the magazine is indexed. When a tool table in which tool No. are previously recorded is used, the tool table does not rotate with rotation of the magazine and the pointer serves as "ring counter"...

  • Page 450: Relationship Between Tool Registration Screen And Magazines

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.4 Relationship Between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines T REGISTRATION Magazine Tool No. -D Pot No. Tool No. Magazine No. (floating pointer method, tool table rotation method) or pot No. (Fixed pointer method) When the floating pointer method or tool table rotation method is selected on the tool registration screen, correspondence display between the magazines and tools changes each time the magazine rotates;...

  • Page 451: Use Of Atc And Rot Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Instructions The use order of the ATC and ROT instructions during the T command or tool change command is shown below: T command Tool No.

  • Page 452: Basic Format Of Atc Exclusive Instruction

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.6 Basic Format of ATC Exclusive Instruction S.ATC Kn Rn Rm Mn END signal ("1" for ERROR signal) Tool number storage R (register) No. (Number of tools in magazine is specified.) Control data buffer R No.

  • Page 453: File Register (R Register) Assignment And Parameters

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.9 File Register (R Register) Assignment and Parameters Control parameter contents R10600 0: T4-digit Max. number of standby 1: T8-digit displayed: 4 0: Magazine starts from "1" 1: Magazine starts from "0"...
  • Page 454 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction File registers for ATC control The file registers used with the ATC are as shown below. Corresponding file (R) register Magazine No.1 magazine No.2 magazine No.3 magazine No.4 magazine No.5 magazine Remarks...
  • Page 455 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction  Tool data assignment when not setting arbitrarily There are up to three magazines, and up to 120 tools per magazine. The tool data assignment is fixed between R10700 and R11779 as shown below. Corresponding file (R) register Magazine No.1 magazine...
  • Page 456 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction  Example of tool data assignment when setting arbitrarily There are up to five magazines, and a total of 360 tools for all magazines. The tool data assignment varies between R10700 and R11779. The data is assigned to the tools starting from the No.

  • Page 457: Details Of Each Instruction

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.10 Details of Each Instruction Tool No. search This instruction is used to search for tool No. stored in the magazine (tool data table). When the instruction tool No. is found, number of searched data and its location are output.
  • Page 458 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction Tool No. logical AND search Tool number AND search is the same as the tool number search instruction (ATC K1) in function: search data and in- magazine tool number and AND data are ANDed together for a search. S.ATC K2 R9800 R10610 M10 R9800 9830...
  • Page 459 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction Tool change When a spindle tool and a magazine index tool are exchanged by the ATC arm, etc., the contents in the memory (R register) must be updated correspondingly. S.ATC K3 R9800 R10610 M10 R No.
  • Page 460 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction Arbitrary position tool change In tool change, a spindle tool is usually exchanged with a magazine index tool. It may often occur, however, that tool change must be performed at a station other than the usual tool change position. (Tool change at spare tool change position, for example) This instruction is used in such cases.
  • Page 461 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction Pointer forward run In the ATC control with variable pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with the actually indexed magazine position when the magazine rotates in forward direction for index. S.ATCK5 R10615 R10610 M10 R10615 Pointer is incremented.
  • Page 462 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction Tool table forward run The tool table rotates in accordance with the magazine rotation. S.ATC K7 R10610 R10610 M10 R10700 1000 R10701 1001 R10710 1010 Note (1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates "0" (tool table head). (2) When this instruction is executed, the relationship between magazine No.
  • Page 463 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction Tool data read This instruction is used to call a specific tool No. in the magazine. S.ATC K9 R9800 R10610 M10 R No. to specify magazine No. to be read R9800 9840 R9801...
  • Page 464 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction Writing the tool data Instead of setting tool No. through the setting and display unit, the tool No. is entered to each magazine No. set through PLC program.
  • Page 465 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction Automatic tool data write All tool Nos. are written (entered) in batch. This instruction is used for initialization, etc. The data are written one after another for each tool, starting from the default value. S.ATC K11 R9800 R10610 M10 R No.

  • Page 466: Precautions For Using Atc Exclusive Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.11 Precautions for Using ATC Exclusive Instructions When tool data is rewritten by ATC or other than ATC instruction, tool registration screen display is not updated. The following processing is required: ...

  • Page 467: Examples Of Tool Registration Screen

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.12 Examples of Tool Registration Screen Tool registration screen examples are given below. For operation, refer to the instruction manual. Comment display area Spindle, standby tool No. display area Magazine tool No.
  • Page 468 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction [Magazine No. start value] Control parameter (R10600) 0: The magazine No. starts at 1. 1: The magazine No. starts at 0. (Example) Magazine number display when the number of magazines is 12. MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D MG TOOL-D The magazine No.

  • Page 469: Display Of Spindle Tool And Standby Tool

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.1 ATC Exclusive Instruction 9.1.13 Display of Spindle Tool and Standby Tool The tool mounted on the spindle or the tool to be mounted next on the spindle (standby tool) and tool No. in the magazine are set and displayed on the tool registration screen.

  • Page 470: Rot Instructions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.2 ROT Instructions 9.2 ROT Instructions With this instruction, the rotary body's target position and rotation direction are determined, as well as the function as a ring counter is realized. Based on the output data figured with the tool No. search of ATC exclusive instruction, this instruction is used when controlling the rotary body position such as calculating rotation direction of the magazine and the number of index steps, and the turret.
  • Page 471 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.2 ROT Instructions  Example of rotary body index by ROT K1 instruction Conditions:  The number of rotary body index is 6.  The target position is set with the T command. The T command is set with the parameters so that it outputs to the PLC with a binary.
  • Page 472 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.2 ROT Instructions File register (R) map S.ROT K1 Rn Rm Mm T command R536 1 to 6 (Binary) (from CNC) Top of control data buffer 0:CW R537 (R9800 in this example) 1:CCW R No.
  • Page 473 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 9 Exclusive Instructions 9.2 ROT Instructions Ring counter (Up/down counter) This instruction is used to control position of rotary body (or turret). S.ROT K3 Rn Rm Mm (Pulse coding) Completion ("1" for error) Ring counter instruction R No.

  • Page 474: Application Functions

    Application Functions IB-1501667-B...
  • Page 475 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 10 Application Functions For details on application functions, refer to "MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Application Functions)". When using application functions, designate the data types with " 〇 " in the following figure. Do not designate the data types with "×" to arguments of application functions since the data types are not supported by CNC. For details on each data type, refer to "MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals)".

  • Page 476: Parameters

    Parameters IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 477: Plc Constants

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.1 PLC Constants 11.1 PLC Constants The parameters that can be used in user PLC include PLC constants set in the data type. The PLC constants include the basic area and the extended area. ...
  • Page 478 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.1 PLC Constants  Extended area Up to 750 PLC constants can be secured by using the user backup area (R8300 to R9799) as the extended area. The extended area start register and number can be set with the parameters. A total of 900 PLC constants can be set with 150 (#18001 to #18150) in the basic area and up to 750 (#18151 to #18900) in the extended area.

  • Page 479: Bit Selection Parameters

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.2 Bit Selection Parameters 11.2 Bit Selection Parameters The parameters that can be used in user PLC include bit selection parameters set in the bit type. Set up data is stored in a file register and is backed up. When using bit operation in a sequence program, use a word device bit-designation format.
  • Page 480 (1) Be sure to set the bits indicated "-" and blanks to "0". (2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by Mitsubishi Electric. (3) Functions marked with " ■ " may not be available for some NC models.
  • Page 481 (1) Be sure to set the bits indicated "-" and blanks to "0". (2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by Mitsubishi Electric. (3) Functions marked with " ■ " may not be available for some NC models.
  • Page 482 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.2 Bit Selection Parameters [Bit selection screen] IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 483: Other Parameters

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.3 Other Parameters 11.3 Other Parameters 11.3.1 PLC Startup Condition Switchover Parameter "#11004 PLCautorun enable" allows PLC to startup at NC startup even if no setting display unit is used. For safety, use this function only for the machine with no NC screen displayed by HMI. ...

  • Page 484: Multi-Project Setting Parameters (Project Setting)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.3 Other Parameters 11.3.2 Multi-Project Setting Parameters (Project Setting) The parameters that set the multi-project will be described in this section. Follow these parameter settings and execute the each project in order. Rebooting CNC is required after the parameter setting.
  • Page 485 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.3 Other Parameters (Example) On M80VW Series: with the 64K step (256K byte) program size and the 2M byte data storage area When the project ratio is set as shown in the above screen shot, the program size and the data storage area size that can be used for each project will be as follows: Project 1 Project 2...

  • Page 486: Multi-Project Setting Parameter (Device Setting)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.3 Other Parameters 11.3.3 Multi-Project Setting Parameter (Device Setting) When setting the multi-project, set the number of the device points that are used in each project. As for the devices that are not registered in this setting screen, it means that they are the devices that use fixed number of points for each project.

  • Page 487: Changing Processing Cycle Of The High-Speed Ladder By The Parameter

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.3 Other Parameters There are precautions as follows for the setting of the multi-project parameter (device setting). [Precautions] (1) Set the number of device points/number of common points in increments of 16 points. (2) Limit the maximum number of points per bit device to be within 32K.

  • Page 488: Initializing Remote I/O At Plc Stop

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.3 Other Parameters 11.3.5 Initializing Remote I/O at PLC STOP When "#11769 Remote I/O Clear" is set to "1", values of output devices allocated to the remote I/O unit are initialized to "0" at PLC stop.
  • Page 489 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (1/2) 11 Parameters 11.3 Other Parameters IB-1501667-B...

  • Page 490: Handling Of M, S, T, B Functions

    Handling of M, S, T, B Functions IB-1501668-B...

  • Page 491: Command Format

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.1 Command Format The following abbreviations are used in the subsequent explanations.  Miscellaneous function (command) -> M function (command)  Spindle function (command) -> S function (command) ...

  • Page 492: Operation Sequence

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish 12.2.1 Operation Sequence When a miscellaneous command (M, S, T or B), which is set to wait for a finish signal with the parameter (#1401 to #1418), is issued in a machining program, the NC outputs the miscellaneous command code data and the "M function strobe"...

  • Page 493: Example Of Machining Program

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish 12.2.2 Example of Machining Program 12.2.2.1 Using FIN1 with M Command N001 G0X10000 Maa Mbb Mcc Mdd ； N002 G0Z-2000; N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh ； Machining program N002 ……...

  • Page 494: Using Fin2 With M Command

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish 12.2.2.2 Using FIN2 with M Command N001 G0X10000 Maa Mbb Mcc Mdd ； N002 G0Z-20000; N003 Mee Mff Mgg Mhh ； Machining program N003 Mee Mff ……...

  • Page 495: When M Commands Continue (Using Fin2 With M Command)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish 12.2.2.3 When M Commands Continue (Using FIN2 with M Command) Machining program M code n FIN2 [Explanation of operation] The general operation is the same as "12.6 Precautions" on the previous page. (a) The CNC confirms that FIN2 has turned OFF, and then output the next code signal and MF.

  • Page 496: Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output The miscellaneous command high-speed output shortens a processing time per miscellaneous function. There are two functions that can be selected individually. ...
  • Page 497 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output The table below shows operational differences between the high-speed method and the normal method. Regarding the sequence process, program an appropriate process for each operation. High-speed method (Parameter "#1278 ext14/bit1"...

  • Page 498: Operation Sequence For The High-Speed Method

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output 12.3.1 Operation Sequence for the High-Speed Method 12.3.1.1 Operation Sequence Which Waits for a Finish Signal from the PLC During Miscellaneous Command Performance When a miscellaneous command (M, S, T or B) is issued in a machining program, the NC logically inverts the miscellaneous command code data and the "M function strobe"...
  • Page 499 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output  In the case where one block contains several M codes If several miscellaneous commands exist within one block, the miscellaneous commands will be completed when all "M function strobe"...

  • Page 500: Operation Sequence Which Does Not Wait For A Finish Signal From The Plc During Miscellaneous Command Performance

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output 12.3.1.2 Operation Sequence Which Does Not Wait for a Finish Signal from the PLC During Miscellaneous Command Performance When a miscellaneous command (M, S, T or B), which is set not to wait for a finish signal with the parameter (#1401 to #1418), is issued in a machining program, the NC outputs the miscellaneous command code data and the "M function strobe"...
  • Page 501 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output Operation sequence when the previous M command is not completed When a miscellaneous command is output with the method that does not wait for a finish signal from the PLC, if the previous miscellaneous command (M, S, T or B) is not completed, a completion of the previous miscellaneous command will be waited and then a new command code and a strobe signal will be output.

  • Page 502: Operation Sequence For Normal Method

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output 12.3.2 Operation Sequence for Normal Method 12.3.2.1 Operation Sequence Which Waits for a Finish Signal from the PLC During Miscellaneous Command Performance Refer to "12.2 Miscellaneous Function Finish".
  • Page 503 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output Operation sequence with the "M function finish 2" signal (FIN2) for completing a miscellaneous com- mand The operation sequence where the "FIN2" signal is used is introduced below. It is essential to program a sequence process that turns OFF the "FIN2"...

  • Page 504: Precautions And Restrictions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.3 Miscellaneous Command High-Speed Output  In the case where a miscellaneous command output is waited (When "FIN2" is used) The program proceeds to the next block when the previous miscellaneous command is completed. (Rising edge of "FIN2") Machining program Next block M code data...

  • Page 505: M Code Independent Output

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.4 M Code Independent Output 12.4 M Code Independent Output The following four types of M codes output "M code independent output" signal (decode signals) separately from their code signals and MF.
  • Page 506 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.4 M Code Independent Output Example of M02 process (Carrying out "Reset & rewind" with M02 command) Reset state In cycle start M code M code independent output *1 FIN does not turn ON.

  • Page 507: Axis Movement And M Commands

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.5 Axis Movement and M Commands 12.5 Axis Movement and M Commands If an M command is issued in the same block as a movement command, whether to process the M command simultaneously with the movement command or to process it after the movement is finished, depends on the "Movement command finish (DEN)"...

  • Page 508: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.6 Precautions 12.6 Precautions (1) M code data and MF output timing (Also applies to S, T, B signal) When the built-in PLC is used, the M code data n and MFn are output simultaneously to the user PLC. When outputting the M code data and MF to the machine with the user PLC of built-in PLC, insert an appropriate time timer on the MF side.
  • Page 509 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 12 Handling of M, S, T, B Functions 12.6 Precautions IB-1501668-B...

  • Page 510: Spindle Control

    Spindle Control IB-1501668-B...

  • Page 511: Related Parameters

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.1 Related Parameters Spindle speed can be directly controlled by an 8-digit S code command. When the S command function specifications are valid, the controller selects an appropriate spindle gear stage corresponding to the 8-digit command following the S code and outputs (spindle gear shift command) it to the machine side (PLC).

  • Page 512: Connection Method

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.2 Connection Method 13.2 Connection Method To serially connect the controller and spindle controller Axis drive unit Spindle drive unit Control unit [Spindle forward run, reverse run, orientation command, etc.] CN1A CN1B [Zero speed, OPTH1,...

  • Page 513: Flow Of Spindle (S) Data

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data 13.3 Flow of Spindle (S) Data Part system 1 SF1(XDA4) Operation program SF1(XC64) R712,R713 R512,R513 S100 ; • R6500 • Spindle parameter (SOUT) R6501 • (For monitoring of Spindle drive unit •...

  • Page 514: Selecting Z Phase Detection Method

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.4 Selecting Z Phase Detection Method 13.4 Selecting Z Phase Detection Method To enable the Z phase detection operation, set the parameter "#3106 zrn_typ/bit3" to "1". The Z phase detection method is switched by the setting of the parameter "#3106 zrn_typ/bitC". The selected Z phase detection method is valid for S command, spindle orientation and spindle position control (spindle/C axis control).

  • Page 515: Proximity Switch Method Orientation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.5 Proximity Switch Method Orientation 13.5 Proximity Switch Method Orientation Proximity switch method orientation performs the positioning with the proximity switch position attached to the spindle end as spindle zero point. There are two methods for proximity switch method orientation: standard method where the servo turns OFF once before the speed decelerates to Z phase detection speed and high-speed method where the servo does not turn OFF.

  • Page 516: Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.6 Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control 13.6 Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control 13.6.1 Outline This function controls a spindle using the combination of servo motor and servo drive unit (MDS-E Series) which controls NC axis.

  • Page 517: Term

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.6 Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control 13.6.2 Term Terms used in this chapter have the following meanings. Term Meanings Spindle A spindle composed of spindle drive unit + spindle motor Spindle-mode servo A spindle composed of servo drive unit + servo motor 13.6.3 Function Enabling Conditions The following settings are required to enable this function.

  • Page 518: Spindle Features Available For Spindle-Mode Servo

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.6 Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control 13.6.4 Spindle Features Available for Spindle-Mode Servo The following spindle features can be applied to a spindle-mode servo motor in the same manner as normal spindle. ...

  • Page 519: Spindle Features With Different Operation Or Settings From Normal Spindle

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.6 Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control 13.6.5 Spindle Features with Different Operation or Settings from Normal Spindle Acceleration and deceleration of spindle-mode servo Unlike the acceleration and deceleration of normal spindle, the spindle-mode servo performs multi-step acceleration and deceleration as illustrated in the figure below when the speed command changes.
  • Page 520 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.6 Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control Orientation, C axis zero return and sync tap orientation of spindle-mode servo If orientation of spindle-mode servo is in the same direction as its rotation, the operation is different from that of normal spindle.

  • Page 521: Example Usage

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.6 Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control 13.6.6 Example Usage T0101 ; : Select the polygon tool (Turn the turret through orientation) G00 X15. ; G44.1 ; : Select the 2nd spindle (Tool spindle S2) M24 S3000 ;...

  • Page 522: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.6 Spindle-Mode Servo Motor Control 13.6.7 Relation with Other Functions  Spindle orientation This function does not support mag-sensor (proximity switch) orientation.  Spindle position control (spindle/C axis control) Under spindle-mode servo control, the spindle/C axis parameter switch cannot be performed in parallel with the change- over between spindle and C axis control.

  • Page 523: Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control 13.7.1 Outline This function enables a rotary axis driven by a servo motor to be controlled as a spindle. When the spindle-mode rotary axis control command signal is turned ON, the rotary axis is controlled as a spindle.

  • Page 524: Function Enabling Conditions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control 13.7.3 Function Enabling Conditions Given below is a configuration example where B axis (S2 spindle) is the objective of spindle-mode rotary axis control. X axis Y axis Z axis B axis S1 axis Servo motors Spindle motor...

  • Page 525: Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control Command

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control (3) Configure the parameters that are needed for the spindle control in the spindle mode. The following parameters are the minimum requirements for the spindle-mode rotary axis control. "#3001 slimt1"...

  • Page 526: Operations At Switchover From Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis To Servo Axis Mode

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control 13.7.5 Operations at Switchover from Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis to Servo Axis Mode There are two types operations to be performed when the mode is switched from spindle-mode rotary axis control to servo axis control.

  • Page 527: Operation When Reset Is Input During Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control 13.7.6 Operation when Reset is Input During Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control Status of the spindle-mode rotary axis control signal is unchanged after NC reset. However, if you change the ON/OFF of the spindle-mode rotary axis control command signal at the same time as the reset, the control mode is switched.

  • Page 528: Orientation Operation During Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control Mode

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control 13.7.9 Orientation Operation During Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control Mode If an orientation command is given during rotation, and the orientation direction is identical to the rotation direction, the spindle decelerates multi-step-wise as illustrated below.

  • Page 529: Example Usage

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control 13.7.11 Example Usage Machining program Description Control mode ： Servo axis mode (servo axis control) G00 B100. F100 ; Perform positioning of B axis Turn ON the spindle-mode rotary axis control (ROTSPC=1) for B axis, the 4th axis M14 ;...

  • Page 530: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control 13.7.12 Relation with Other Functions  Orientation This function does not support mag-sensor (proximity switch) orientation. Even when the proximity switch orientation is ON ("#3106 zrn_typ/bitF" = "1"), the orientation is disabled. When the "Spindle-mode rotary axis command"...

  • Page 531: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.7 Spindle-Mode Rotary Axis Control 13.7.13 Precautions (1) When using the spindle-mode rotary axis control, disable the collision detection function. The parameter "#2260 SV060 TLMT" (Collision detection level) needs to be set to "0" to disable the collision detection. (2) The available spindle speed at the spindle end is up to the maximum (a value obtained by dividing "#2001 rapid"...

  • Page 532: Turret Gear Change Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.8 Turret Gear Change Control 13.8 Turret Gear Change Control 13.8.1 Outline This function enables axes in the semi-closed system to select four types of gear ratios which are set to the spindle specification parameters according to the control input from the PLC.

  • Page 533: Function Enabling Conditions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.8 Turret Gear Change Control 13.8.2 Function Enabling Conditions The semi-closed system is required to enable this function. This is enabled by configuring the spindle as follows. (1) Set "#43001 sgear_tret (enable turret gear change)" to "1". (2) Set "#43002 SGRA1 (spindle gear ratio 1)"...
  • Page 534 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.8 Turret Gear Change Control Example of gear change operations when the spindle is not operating Spindle end rotation speed [r/min] 3000 1000 $1 Commanded program M03 S3000 ･･･ ･･･ NC→PLC Gear 1 Gear 2 S1 Spindle gear shift command...
  • Page 535 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.8 Turret Gear Change Control Example of gear change operations from the mill to turret gear The following example is for a turret tool stand that rotates a turret and tool spindle by changing gears with one motor. Motor side rotation speed [r/min] ･･･...
  • Page 536 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.8 Turret Gear Change Control Example of gear change operation when the spindle is operating The following example is for a turret tool stand equipped with a turret motor and a spindle motor. Rotation speed [r/min] Gear change in progress Gear change in progress...

  • Page 537: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.8 Turret Gear Change Control 13.8.4 Relation with Other Functions Allowing/denying gear changes when related functions are operating The following table lists the operation that occurs when a command to change gears is output while related functions are operating.
  • Page 538 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.8 Turret Gear Change Control Function name Status Operation Remarks Synchronous tapping cycle/tap cycle/ During synchro- Do not change Changes spindle gears after waiting for the operation in the partic- thread cutting/thread cutting cycle nization tap- ular mode to complete when gear change commands are output ping operation...

  • Page 539: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.8 Turret Gear Change Control Operation when commands are sent to related functions while changing gears The following table lists the operations that occur when a command is sent to related functions while changing gears. The operations in the following table also apply when the spindle-mode servo motor control is operating.

  • Page 540: Multiple-Spindle Control Ii

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.9 Multiple-Spindle Control II 13.9 Multiple-Spindle Control II 13.9.1 Function and purpose Multiple-spindle control II is a function that designates which spindle to select with the signals from PLC. The command is issued to the spindle with one S command.
  • Page 541 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.9 Multiple-Spindle Control II Spindle rotation speed control There are two methods for spindle rotation speed control. Which to use can be selected by the parameter "#1300 ext36/bit1" (Spindle control for each part system). ...
  • Page 542 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.9 Multiple-Spindle Control II Operation when the spindle function (S) command and miscellaneous function (M) command are issued in the same block When a spindle function (S) command is given in the same block as an M code for spindle selection (SWS: Y18A8) or for spindle command selection (SLSP: R7002), you can select the spindle to update the spindle command rotation speed input (R6500/R6501) with the parameter "#1300 ext36/bit3 (Spindle command rotation speed input timing selection)".

  • Page 543: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.9 Multiple-Spindle Control II 13.9.3 Relation with Other Functions  Spindle clamp speed setting (G92) This is valid only on the spindle selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS). The spindle not selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS) maintains the speed at which it was rotating before being canceled.

  • Page 544: Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.10 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) 13.10 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) 13.10.1 Outline A spindle can be controlled as the rotary axis. After switching the spindle to the rotary axis, the positioning and the interpolation between the spindle and other NC axes can be operated in the same way as the NC axis by executing the position command (the movement command).

  • Page 545: Change Types

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.10 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) 13.10.3 Change Types The type of operations to change from spindle mode to C-axis mode includes the zero point return type (#3106 zrn_typ/bit8 = 0) and the decelerate and stop type (#3106 zrn_typ/bit8 = 1).

  • Page 546: Details On Operation Per Type

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.10 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) 13.10.4 Details on Operation per Type 13.10.4.1 Zero Point Return Type Encoder Method Method configuration Item Parameter Zero point return type #3106 zrn_typ/bit8 = 0 Note (1) This can be configured for each spindle.
  • Page 547 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.10 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control)  Speed pattern during zero point return  The zero point return from a spindle stop accelerates at a constant slope until it reaches the zero point return speed (#3112 cax_spd) and then decelerates at a constant slope and stops at the zero point (Z phase).
  • Page 548 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.10 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control)  Zero point return while spindle is at a standstill  Returns to the zero point (Z-phase position) in accordance with the direction of zero point return parameter for the spindle C axis (#3106 zrn_typ/bit A-9).

  • Page 549: Decelerate And Stop Type (No Zero Point Return)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.10 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) 13.10.4.2 Decelerate and Stop Type (No Zero Point Return) Method configuration Item Parameter Decelerate and stop type #3106 zrn_typ/bit8=1 No return to origin #1226 aux 10/bit3=0 Note (1) This can be configured for each spindle.

  • Page 550: Decelerate And Stop Type (Zero Point Return)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.10 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) 13.10.4.3 Decelerate and Stop Type (Zero Point Return) Method configuration Item Parameter Decelerate and stop type #3106 zrn_typ/bit8=1 Zero point return #1226 aux10/bit3=1 Note (1) When the zero point return type is selected, spindles set to the decelerate and stop type will all be changed to the zero point return type (default/initial-only).

  • Page 551: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.10 Spindle Position Control (Spindle/C Axis Control) 13.10.5 Precautions (1) Turning the "servo OFF" signal (*SVFn) OFF while the C axis is moving and changing from the C-axis mode to the spin- dle mode results in generation of the operation error (M01 005).

  • Page 552: Spindle Synchronization Control Ll

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.11 Spindle Synchronization Control ll 13.11 Spindle Synchronization Control ll 13.11.1 Function and Purpose For spindle synchronization function ll, selection of the synchronized spindle and synchronization start, etc., are all designated from the PLC.
  • Page 553 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.11 Spindle Synchronization Control ll  Starting spindle synchronization The spindle synchronization mode is entered by inputting the spindle synchronization signal (SPSY). The synchronized spindle will be controlled in synchronization with the rotation speed commanded for the reference spindle during the spindle synchronization mode.
  • Page 554 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.11 Spindle Synchronization Control ll  Spindle phase alignment Spindle phase synchronization starts when the spindle phase synchronization signal (SPPHS) is input during the spindle synchronization mode. The spindle phase synchronization complete signal is output when the spindle synchronization phase reach level setting value (#3051 spplv) is reached.
  • Page 555 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.11 Spindle Synchronization Control ll  Calculating the spindle synchronization phase shift amount and requesting phase offset The spindle phase shift amount calculation function obtains and saves the phase difference of the reference spindle and synchronized spindle by turning the PLC signal ON during spindle synchronization.
  • Page 556 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.11 Spindle Synchronization Control ll  Phase error monitor The phase error can be monitored during spindle phase synchronization. Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation The phase error during spindle phase synchronization control is R6519 Phase error monitor output as a pulse unit.
  • Page 557 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.11 Spindle Synchronization Control ll  Multi-step acceleration/deceleration Up to eight steps of acceleration/deceleration time constants for spindle synchronization can be selected according to the spindle rotation speed. (F) Rotation speed (T) Time Sptc3 (1) Time required from stopped state to sptc1 setting rotation speed...

  • Page 558: Precautions And Restrictions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.11 Spindle Synchronization Control ll 13.11.3 Precautions and Restrictions (1) When carrying out spindle synchronization, a rotation command must be issued to both the reference spindle and syn- chronized spindle. The synchronized spindle's rotation direction will follow the reference spindle rotation direction and spindle synchronization rotation direction designation regardless of whether a forward or reverse run command is issued.

  • Page 559: Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization 13.12.1 Outline This function is for a machine with a spindle motor to rotate a guide bushing: This function allows the guide bushing spindle motor (hereinafter called G/B spindle) to synchronize with a reference spindle motor (hereinafter called reference spindle).
  • Page 560 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization Explanation of operation [Signal timing chart of G/B spindle synchronization] Signal from PLC to CNC (a) G/B spindle synchronization Stopping Stopping valid (GBON) Signal from CNC to PLC (b) G/B spindle synchronizing mode (GBMOD)

  • Page 561: Phase Alignment Of Reference Spindle And G/B Spindle

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization 13.12.2.2 Phase Alignment of Reference Spindle and G/B Spindle In order to insert a square bar, it is necessary to align the phases of the reference spindle and the G/B spindle. For the phase alignment, it is necessary to save the phase gap between the reference spindle and the G/B spindle when inserting the bar for the first time.
  • Page 562 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization Explanation of operation [Signal timing chart of G/B spindle synchronization phase memory/phase alignment] Signal from PLC to CNC <Square bar is inserted the second time <Square bar is inserted the first and following (phase alignment)>...

  • Page 563: G/B Spindle Synchronization Position Error Compensation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization 13.12.2.3 G/B Spindle Synchronization Position Error Compensation When machining a square bar during G/B spindle synchronization mode, the bar’s torsion may cause either of the reference spindle or the G/B spindle the overload alarm (S03 Overload 1 0050) or the over regeneration alarm (S03 Over regeneration 0030, S04 Pw sply: Over regeneration 0073).
  • Page 564 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization Explanation of operation [Timing chart of G/B spindle synchronization position error compensation 1] (Compensation signal ON at chuck close, and the signal turns OFF at chuck open [Keep position error compensation amount signal OFF]) Signal from PLC to CNC (a) G/B spindle...
  • Page 565 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization Precautions (1) If the alarms cannot be avoided even though the "G/B spindle synchronization: position error compensation" (GBCMON) signal is ON, increase the number of times of compensations. Note that the larger the number of times of compensations is, the longer the measurement time for the position error com- pensation becomes.

  • Page 566: Relative Position Error Sampling

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization 13.12.2.4 Relative Position Error Sampling During G/B spindle synchronization mode, the following five values are calculated based on the relative position error between the reference spindle and the G/B spindle, and they are output to the R registers when the state changes between the acceleration/deceleration state and the steady state.
  • Page 567 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization [R registers to output the relative position error] R register Operation Maximum value ((a) above) of the relative position error is written after the spindle Maximum range of the relative motor completes acceleration.

  • Page 568: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization 13.12.3 Relation with Other Functions A: Available A A (*n): Available (with restriction) N/A: Not available Operation Function name Remarks Reference G/B spindle spindle A(*11) N/A(*4) (*4) The operation error (M01 1138) occurs if the G/B spindle is commanded as a synchronous tapping spindle.
  • Page 569 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization Operation Function name Remarks Reference G/B spindle spindle A(*3) (*3) During G/B spindle synchronization, the spindle C axis parameter can- not be changed. The operation error (M01 1014) occurs when servo ON is carried out for C axis.

  • Page 570: Precautions And Restrictions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.12 Guide Bushing Spindle Synchronization 13.12.4 Precautions and Restrictions (1) In the G/B spindle synchronization function, both reference spindle and G/B spindle are required to be controlled by the spindle drive unit. (2) The lower setting value between the reference spindle and the G/B spindle is used as the limit rotation speed of the G/B spindle synchronization mode signal.

  • Page 571: Spindle Oscillation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.13 Spindle Oscillation 13.13 Spindle Oscillation 13.13.1 Outline This function reciprocates (oscillates) the spindle at the specified amplitude and frequency. 13.13.2 Detailed Description Spindle oscillation starts when the spindle oscillation command signal (Y18C8) is turned ON. The spindle decelerates and stops when the spindle oscillation command signal is turned OFF.
  • Page 572 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.13 Spindle Oscillation When the rotational speed of the spindle calculated from the amplitude and frequency exceeds the maximum rotational speed spindle parameters ("#3005 smax1 Maximum Rotational Speed (gear: 00)" through ("#3008 smax4 Maximum Rotational Speed (gear: 11)"), the spindle cannot oscillate at the configured frequency, which results in generation of the operation error (M01 1110).
  • Page 573 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.13 Spindle Oscillation Note (1) Stops and starts of spindle oscillation are executed with the level trigger for the spindle oscillation command signal, but stops and starts of spindle oscillation are executed with the edge trigger for scenarios when emergency stop has been executed.

  • Page 574: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.13 Spindle Oscillation 13.13.3 Relation with Other Functions The following table lists the restrictions on synchronous operation when other function commands are output during execution of spindle oscillation or when the spindle oscillation command is output during the execution of other functions. ○...

  • Page 575: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.13 Spindle Oscillation (*1) This represents whether function commands are allowed/not allowed while spindle oscillation is in operation. If a com- mand for a function that is not allowed is output while spindle oscillation is in operation, the operation error (M01 1108) is generated.

  • Page 576: Multiple Spindle Synchronization Set Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.14 Multiple Spindle Synchronization Set Control 13.14 Multiple Spindle Synchronization Set Control 13.14.1 Outline This function is used to combine and control the following spindle control functions simultaneously. The same functions can be combined. When a certain pair of spindles has been designated for one spindle control function, a different pair of spindles can be used for another spindle control function.
  • Page 577 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.14 Multiple Spindle Synchronization Set Control This function enables the following combinations of machining. [Example of lathe system] Spindle synchronization I command (S1-S2)+ Tool spindle syn- Spindle synchronization I command (S1-S2)+ Tool spindle syn- chronization IA command (S3-S4) chronization IA command (S1-S5) Spindle synchronization I command (S1-S2) + Tool spindle syn-...

  • Page 578: Function Enabling Conditions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.14 Multiple Spindle Synchronization Set Control 13.14.2 Function Enabling Conditions  This function can be applied to a lathe system equipped with two or more spindles.  To enable this function, set the parameter "#1440 multi_sp_syn (Multiple spindle synchronization valid)" to "1". (After setting the parameter, turn OFF and ON the NC power.) If the parameter "#1440 multi_sp_syn (Multiple spindle synchronization valid)"...
  • Page 579 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 13 Spindle Control 13.14 Multiple Spindle Synchronization Set Control IB-1501668-B...

  • Page 580: Plc Help Function

    PLC Help Function IB-1501668-B...
  • Page 581 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function To help the user PLC, an exclusive interface is provided between the user PLC and controller. The function and interface are explained below. PLC help function examples:  Tool life management ...

  • Page 582: Program Format Switch

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.1 Program Format Switch 14.1 Program Format Switch 14.1.1 Outline G code switch of program format ("program format switch" hereafter) is a function designed to switch the program format (G code system) using G codes (G188/G189) or PLC signal.
  • Page 583 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.1 Program Format Switch Program format switch OFF When the Program format switch request signal (PFCHR: YD00) is turned OFF, the control switches the program format from M-system back to L-system G code system (a system selected by the parameter "#1037 cmdtyp"). When cancel of the program format switch is completed, the Program format switch in progress signal (PFCHS: XCF0) turns OFF.
  • Page 584 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.1 Program Format Switch Interaction between G code and PLC I/F methods There are two type of means to switch the program format: G code method (G188/G189) and PLC I/F method (ON/OFF of PFCHR).

  • Page 585: Manual Speed Command

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command 14.2 Manual Speed Command In the memory or MDI mode, validate the manual speed command and select any one of handle feed, jog (manual feed) or manual rapid traverse so that the automatic operation is carried out at the feedrate.
  • Page 586 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command  When this function is valid, MST or dwell commands are executed the same as in the normal automatic operation. Therefore, if MST is commanded to the same block as the movement block, the program does not move to the next block before the MST command is completed.
  • Page 587 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command  If the manual speed command valid signal is turned ON during the cycle start, the automatic operation is paused. However, even if the manual speed command valid signal is turned ON while executing the thread cutting, the manual speed com- mand is kept invalid until the next block's end point of where the thread cutting is completed.
  • Page 588 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command  Operation example 1 (When giving the manual speed command in automatic operation "run" of a machining program) (1) Search a machining program and execute the cycle start in memory mode. (2) Command the automatic operation pause during the N200 block execution.
  • Page 589 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command  Operation example 2 (When giving the manual speed command at the start of machining program) (1) Search the machining program. Turn ON memory mode. (2) Turn ON memory mode, the "manual speed command valid" signal and handle mode. (3) When the handle is rotated in the (+) direction, the axis starts to move with the handle feedrate from the head block.

  • Page 590: Manual Speed Command (When The Parameter "#1365 Manualftype" Is Set To "0")

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command 14.2.1 Manual Speed Command (When the Parameter "#1365 Manualftype" is Set to "0")  The feedrate is set as follows depending on the manual mode: - In the handle mode The feedrate of the 1st handle's 1st axis is applied.
  • Page 591 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command  The feedrate is set as follows depending on the manual mode: - In the handle mode The feedrate of the 1st handle's 1st axis * program command speed ratio (The handle magnification of the smallest number's part system across the part systems that the manual speed com- mand is enabled) - In the JOG mode...
  • Page 592 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command Operation example <Machining program of 1st part sys- tem> N104 N101 G91 G0 X10. Y10. ; N102 G1 X10. F100 ; N103 G3 Y20. J10. F600 ; N104 G1 X-10.
  • Page 593 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command (7) Command M30 at the N106, N206 blocks to end the program by NC reset or completion. Automatic The axis moves according to the path commanded by the machining operation in program at a handle feed rate to which the ratio of the command speeds memory mode...
  • Page 594 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command  Operation example 2 (When the manual speed command is enabled at the third block of the 1st part sys- tem and the second block of the 2nd part system) (1) Search a machining program and execute the cycle start of the 1st part system in memory mode.
  • Page 595 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command Restrictions and precautions regarding manual speed command 2 (1) When using this function involving multiple part systems, the manual mode (handle/JOG/rapid traverse), the manual speed command reverse run valid signal and the manual speed command sign reversed signal must be the same between part systems where the manual speed command is enabled.

  • Page 596: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command 14.2.3 Precautions (1) The execution of the manual speed command ignores the cycle start. (2) If the asynchronous tapping is executed while the manual speed command is valid, the pitch will not be the same as com- manded.

  • Page 597: List Of Signals

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command (6) In the corner chamfering/corner R, a reverse run ends at the start point of the corner chamfering/corner R. (7) If the 3-dimensional circular interpolation has been carried out beyond the intermediate point, a reverse run ends at the intermediate point.
  • Page 598 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command Signal abbre- Contact Signal name viation MANUAL SPEED COMMAND VALID YC9D YDDD YF1D Y105D [Function] This signal is used to run the machining program with handle feedrate or JOG feedrate (manual feedrate). [Operation] After this signal is ON, manual speed (handle or manual feedrate) is applied to the axis feedrate in the whole automatic operation: the speed commanded in the program is not used.
  • Page 599 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command [Related signals] (1) Manual speed command sign reversed (YC9E) (2) Manual speed command reverse run valid (YC9F) (3) In automatic operation "pause" (SPL: XC14) (4) In manual speed command valid (XC48) Signal abbre- Contact Signal name...
  • Page 600 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.2 Manual Speed Command Signal abbre- Contact Signal name viation MANUAL SPEED COMMAND RE- YC9F YDDF YF1F Y105F VERSE RUN VALID [Function] This signal allows the manual speed command in the (-) direction to reverse the movement against the program. [Operation] When this signal turns ON during the manual speed is commanded, a speed command in the (-) direction in handle or JOG mode reverses the movement against the program.

  • Page 601: Thread Recutting

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.3 Thread Recutting 14.3 Thread Recutting 14.3.1 Outline The function stores a thread groove position and compensates a start position of spindle thread cutting automatically so that the tool can pass along the memorized position of the thread groove at the thread cutting execution. Thread machined workpieces which have problems such as the thread number shortage, striped groove, etc., can be re-chucked and thread re- cut.

  • Page 602: Detailed Description

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.3 Thread Recutting To perform the thread recutting operation, enable thread recutting and execute the program after describing the thread groove positions. The are two methods of thread recutting, which can be switched using parameters. Change parameter Method Overview of operation...

  • Page 603: Storing The Thread Recutting Position

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.3 Thread Recutting 14.3.2.3 Storing the Thread Recutting Position The "Operation to Store the Thread Cutting Position" is equivalent to steps 2 through 5 of the "Method of Operation". The thread recutting position record stores the machine position of the lead axis when the tool is aligned with the thread groove and stores the spindle angle.

  • Page 604: Deleting Thread Recutting Positions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.3 Thread Recutting 14.3.2.4 Deleting Thread Recutting Positions [Operation to delete thread recutting positions] (1) Set the delete bit (bit1) in R2626 (thread recutting command). (2) Turn ON the R2626 (thread recutting command) command execution bit (bit7) and delete the thread recutting position. ->...

  • Page 605: Handling Of The Shift Amount (Q Command) At The Start Of Thread Cutting During The Thread Recutting Process

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.3 Thread Recutting 14.3.2.7 Handling of the Shift Amount (Q Command) at the Start of Thread Cutting During the Thread Recutting Process When thread recutting is enabled, handling of the shift amount (Q command) at the start of thread cutting is changed with "#1258 set 30/bit5".

  • Page 606: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.3 Thread Recutting 14.3.3 Relation with Other Functions  Fixed cycle for turning machining Thread recutting can also be performed with the thread cutting cycle (G78) of the fixed cycle for turning machining. ...

  • Page 607: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.3 Thread Recutting 14.3.4 Precautions (1) Stored positions are deleted when the power is turned OFF. The thread recutting operation must be reperformed from the beginning after the power is turned back ON. (2) To store the thread groove position, the spindle to be stored after the power is turned ON must be finished with the Z phase detection.

  • Page 608: Manual Speed Clamp

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.4 Manual Speed Clamp 14.4 Manual Speed Clamp 14.4.1 Outline The maximum speed for manual feed can be switched to the rapid traverse rate or the manual feed clamp speed. This function is usable, for instance, when the axis speed needs to be clamped at an arbitrary rate for performing a manual feed with a cutting cover opened.

  • Page 609: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.4 Manual Speed Clamp 14.4.3 Relation with Other Functions The manual feed speed clamp is invalid in the following functions.  Manual reference position return (dog-type)  Automatic dog-less type reference position return ...

  • Page 610: Reservation Of Tool Wear Compensation (Lathe System)

    (*1) Setting of reserved tool wear compensation memory - Custom API Reflected by the PLC signal Setting of tool wear compensation memory - Mitsubishi Electric standard screen - Custom API - Compensation data input by Compen- program Tool wear...

  • Page 611: Operation Explanation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.5 Reservation of Tool Wear Compensation (Lathe System) 14.5.2 Operation Explanation (1) When the reserved tool wear compensation memory has never been initialized after setting "#8140 Reserve T wear com" to "1", the contents of the tool wear compensation memory is copied to the reserved tool wear compensation memory and initialized.

  • Page 612: Usage Examples

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.5 Reservation of Tool Wear Compensation (Lathe System) 14.5.3 Usage Examples When you execute a machining program from the top to M99 without rewriting tool wear compensation memory, and then rewrite the tool wear compensation memory during repetition of the program.

  • Page 613: Workpiece Coordinate System Shift

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift 14.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Carry out the automatic setting for the workpiece coordinate system shift amount using the "Workpiece measurement" signal. 14.6.1 Operation Method (1) Carry out the reference position return.

  • Page 614: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.6 Workpiece Coordinate System Shift Note  When the compensation No. is "0", the compensation amount will be calculated as "0".  If the compensation No. exceeds the number of specified offset sets, the operation message "Offset No. not found" appears.

  • Page 615: Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run (Program Check Operation)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.7 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run (Program Check Operation) 14.7 Manual Arbitrary Reverse Run (Program Check Operation) The manual arbitrary reverse run can be performed by controlling the feedrate being in the automatic operation in the memory or MDI mode in proportion to the manual feedrate by jog or the rotation speed by manual handle.

  • Page 616: High-Speed Simple Program Check

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.8 High-Speed Simple Program Check 14.8 High-Speed Simple Program Check This function checks whether a program error occurs by operating the machining program without the axes movements. The estimated machining time can be checked in time shorter than the actual execution time of the machining program. This function is valid with the "High-speed simple program check"...

  • Page 617: Starting The High-Speed Simple Program Check

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.8 High-Speed Simple Program Check 14.8.2 Starting the High-Speed Simple Program Check Inputting the high-speed simple program check mode signal (Y73E) while the memory mode or MDI mode for the operable part system is on turns ON the high-speed simple program check mode ON signal (X712).
  • Page 618 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.8 High-Speed Simple Program Check  Operation sequence (when turning OFF the high-speed simple program check mode signal (Y73E) while any part system is in cycle operation) When starting cycle operation while the high-speed simple program check mode ON signal (X712) is already turned ON and the high-speed simple program check mode signal (Y73E) is turned OFF during operation in the high-speed simple program check mode, the mode ON signal (X712) stays on until operation of all part systems ends.
  • Page 619 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.8 High-Speed Simple Program Check Miscellaneous command output function Output of miscellaneous commands during the high-speed simple program check can be enabled/disabled with parameters. Enabling/disabling of the miscellaneous command output is set when the related parameters and PLC signals satisfy the conditions listed in the following table.

  • Page 620: Estimated Processing Time

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.8 High-Speed Simple Program Check 14.8.3 Estimated Processing Time The estimated processing time for processing programs during the high-speed simple program check is output to the time measurement output registers (R372 and R373). The unit of measurement for the estimated processing time is [ms].

  • Page 621: Coordinate Position Check

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.8 High-Speed Simple Program Check 14.8.4 Coordinate Position Check This function is used to confirm that machine positions match for the operation start and end times of processing programs when creating processing programs with reduced execution times by omitting reference point returns through the alignment of operation start positions, or when creating the same workpiece by continuously repeating the same program.
  • Page 622 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.8 High-Speed Simple Program Check [Timing chart example] Alarms are generated during part system 2 High-speed simple program check mode (Y73E) High-speed simple program check mode ON (X712) Automatic operation "start" (ST): $1/$2 Processing program: $1 (No difference between start...

  • Page 623: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.8 High-Speed Simple Program Check 14.8.5 Relation with Other Functions Name of Function Operation Spindle/C-axis function The display of workpiece values update for the C axis via the machine lock when spindle mode is selected (C- axis servo off).

  • Page 624: Manual Numerical Value Command

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.9 Manual Numerical Value Command 14.9 Manual Numerical Value Command For each S, M, T, G and B command, the data type to output to PLC program is designated by parameters "#12006 Mbin" (M binary), "#12008 Sbin"...

  • Page 625: Arbitrary Reverse Run

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run This function allows a program to run the executed blocks backward (hereinafter called "reverse run") after the block stop in the automatic operation. The following steps are available: (1) Execute the reverse run to the point to go back.
  • Page 626 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run Valid G code Only the specified G codes allow the reverse run. Valid G codes are shown below. The G codes out of the list are invalid. Do not execute the reverse run to the invalid G codes. G code group Valid/Invalid Valid G code (default G code if invalid)
  • Page 627 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run Reverse run  When the "Automatic operation "start" command" (ST) signal is turned ON and OFF under all the following conditions, NC starts the reverse run based on the reverse run information. The same conditions are required to start the reverse run during the forward run.
  • Page 628 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run  The following shows the movement when the "Reverser run" (VRV) signal is turned ON/OFF in different operation states. Operation Operation The "Reverse run" signal is turned ON/OFF The setting value of the parameter "#1338 rev data save trg"...
  • Page 629 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run Forward run  When the "Automatic operation "start" command" (ST) signal is turned ON and OFF under all the following conditions, NC starts the forward run based on the reverse run information. - The "Reverse run"...
  • Page 630 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run  After the forward run has completed to the block where the reverse run had started, the movement continues to execute the remaining machining programs that had been automatically stopped. If the "Single block" signal is ON, the movement stops at each block end.
  • Page 631 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run S, T and 2nd miscellaneous function command in the reverse/forward run In the reverse run, NC outputs an S command only upon a change of the modal value: the S command with the changed modal value is output to "S code data"...
  • Page 632 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run Restrictions  A buffer correction to the block for the reverse/forward run is not allowed in the reverse run control (reverse/forward run). The buffer correction is available to the blocks after the block where the reverse run starts. ...
  • Page 633 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run  Do not turn ON/OFF the "Optional block skip" (BDTn) signal under the reverse run control (in the reverse/forward run). The path after the change is the same as in the normal operation. ...
  • Page 634 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run  Operation example [To return the tool to the interruption point and start a cycle again] Keep the "Reverse run from block start" (RVSP) signal OFF when starting a reverse run. To execute a reverse run after returning from the macro program, carry out a block stop when returning, turn ON the "Reverse run"...
  • Page 635 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run [To return to the start point in the block under the interruption and start a reverse run] Turn ON the "Reverse run from block start" (RVSP) signal when starting the reverse run. N01 G90 G54 X0 Y0 ;...
  • Page 636 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run  Precautions  Make sure to start a reverse run on the point (or the block start point) where the interruption occurs. If a reverse run starts with a block stop in a macro interrupt program, the movement seems to start at the point (or the block start point) where the interruption occurs.
  • Page 637 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run  In a macro interrupt program, start a reverse run at the point (or the block start point) where the interruption occurs and which a M99 (complete sub program) block follows. If a reverse run has started with a block stop in the macro interrupt program, the movement returns to the interruption start point in the forward run, and then jumps to the next block of the reverse run start block in the macro interrupt program.
  • Page 638 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run System variable The following shows the system variables used in the reverse run control.  Position information End point coordinate of Position information Start point coordinate of block End point coordinate of block the immediately peceding Axis No.
  • Page 639 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run PLC -> NC interface signal Signal abbre- Contact Signal name viation REVERSE RUN YC27 YACA YAD2 YADA [Function] This signal is used to select reverse/forward run in the arbitrary reverse run. [Operation] Forward run is executed when this signal is OFF.
  • Page 640 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.10 Arbitrary Reverse Run Signal abbre- Contact Signal name viation MACRO INTERRUPT PRIORITY RVIT YD09 YE49 YF89 Y10C9 [Function] In the arbitrary reverse run, turning ON the "Macro interrupt" (UIT) signal executes a block stop during the reverse run. Then this signal is used to select the operation when an automatic operation is started while the "Reverse run"...

  • Page 641: Coordinate Rotation By Parameter

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.11 Coordinate Rotation by Parameter 14.11 Coordinate Rotation by Parameter 14.11.1 Outline If a deviation occurs between the workpiece alignment line and machine coordinate system's coordinate axis when the workpiece is mounted, the machine can be controlled by rotating the machining program coordinates according to the workpiece alignment line deviation.

  • Page 642: Function Enabling Conditions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.11 Coordinate Rotation by Parameter 14.11.2 Function Enabling Conditions  The parameter "#8116 CoordRotPara invd" is set to "0".  The parameter "#8627 Coord rot angle" is set. Alternatively, "#8625 Coord rot vctr(H)" and "#8626 Coord rot vctr(V)" are set.

  • Page 643: Plc Interface

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.11 Coordinate Rotation by Parameter 14.11.4 PLC Interface Con- Signal ab- Signal name tact breviation COORDINATE ROTATION BY PARAM- ETER: MANUAL FEED COORDINATE XC5F XD9F XEDF X101F X115F X129F X13DF X151F SYSTEM [Function]...

  • Page 644: Chopping

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping 14.12 Chopping With this function, the chopping axis constantly moves back and forth independently of the program operation during executing the machining program. NC -> PLC interface signal Signal abbre- Contact Signal name...
  • Page 645 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Signal abbre- Contact Signal name viation IN CHOPPING MODE CHPMD XC85 XDC5 XF05 X1045 [Function][Operation] This signal turns ON in the state of chopping mode. Signal abbre- Contact Signal name viation STROKE COMPENSATION COMPLE-...
  • Page 646 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Signal abbre- Contact Signal name viation CHOPPING ERROR NO. R554 R754 R954 R1154 [Function] This signal notifies the user PLC the alarm details when an alarm occurs during chopping operation. [Operation] Chopping error No.
  • Page 647 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping PLC -> NC interface signals Signal abbre- Contact Signal name viation CHOPPING CHPS YC30 YD70 YEB0 YFF0 [Function] This signal validates the chopping function. [Operation] The chopping mode is entered at the rising edge of this signal. Signal abbre- Contact Signal name...
  • Page 648 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Signal abbre- Contact Signal name viation CHOPPING OVERRIDE CHPOV R2503 R2703 R2903 R3103 [Function] The chopping override can be set in the range between 0 and 100%. The value is set directly in the R register for chopping override. (The code method setting is not available.) The data is set in R2503.
  • Page 649 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Chopping operation start The chopping mode is entered at the rising edge of the "Chopping" signal (CHPS), and the chopping operation is started based on the position determined with the program, etc. The chopping control sequence is the following.
  • Page 650 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping  In manual mode In the jog and step mode, when the chopping axis is not moving, the chopping operation is started at the rising edge of the "Chopping"...
  • Page 651 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Chopping operation stop The chopping operation is stopped at the falling edge of the "Chopping" signal from the PLC. The chopping axis moves to the basic position with the rapid traverse after executing the chopping operation to the upper dead center point.
  • Page 652 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Chopping compensation method Because this function involves high-speed repetitive motions, the positioning method allowing compensation based on the calculation from the machinery operation (feedback position of the motor side) is adapted, rather than the method using in- position check.
  • Page 653 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping  Compensation value sequential update method Every chopping command starts with "0" compensation amount. Compensation amount is calculated every 4-cycle chopping operation, and then the compensation is carried out. [Prevent from updating the chopping compensation amount] With the compensation value sequential update method, the stroke normally fluctuates by changing the speed of chopping operation.
  • Page 654 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping [The operation of the compensation amount fixed method] Chopping start Record mode? (Playback mode) Set the initial Set the compensation data in the record area as compensation amount to the initial compensation "0".
  • Page 655 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Chopping control data Rn is specified with the PLC device (chopping control data address). Data to be used differs depending on whether the compensation value sequential update method is applied or compensation amount fixed method is applied.
  • Page 656 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping (*1) If an alarm occurs when the chopping parameter valid signal is turned ON, Rn bit is turned ON. Alarm details is output to the chopping error No. (R554), as well. Rn bit Error Cause...
  • Page 657 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Chopping control data: Compensation amount record area (Dedicated for compensation value fixed method) Rm is specified with the parameter (#1324 chop_R). Error status (in playback mode) (Rm) bit0 : This is turned ON when the difference between the motor side feedback amplitude width and the commanded width has exceeded the tolerance set with the parameter (#2080 chwid).
  • Page 658 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Procedures for setting the chopping control data  Set the chopping control data to R register.  Turn the chopping parameter valid signal ON. Chopping control data is written into the current parameter area inside the NC at the rising edge of the chopping parameter valid signal and is reflected to the chopping operation.
  • Page 659 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Chopping feedrate The chopping axis feedrate is clamped at the chopping axis clamp speed (#2081 chclsp). When "0" is set to the chopping clamp speed, the chopping axis feedrate is clamped at the G1 clamp speed (#2002 clamp). The acceleration/deceleration time constant is set with chopping axis acceleration/deceleration time constant (#2141 chtL).
  • Page 660 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Setting example for the compensation value sequential update method The following data is set using R8300 to R8311 as buffer area. Data Decimal Setting details Rapid traverse override valid/invalid 0001 Valid Chopping axis designation...
  • Page 661 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.12 Chopping Setting example for the compensation value fixed method The following data is set using R8600 to R8613 as buffer area. R8700(#1324 chop_R = 8700) is used for the compensation amount record area. Data Decimal Setting details...

  • Page 662: Automatic Error Detection

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.13 Automatic Error Detection 14.13 Automatic Error Detection 14.13.1 Outline The cutting at corner area (the continuous blocks with different movement directions) may have rounding because of acceleration/deceleration or servo response delay. Turning ON the error detection increases the edge accuracy; however, the cycle time will be longer as the deceleration check is performed in every cutting block.

  • Page 663: Function Enabling Conditions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.13 Automatic Error Detection 14.13.2 Function Enabling Conditions This function is switched to ON/OFF with the PLC signals. This function is ON when the error detection signal (ERD) is OFF and the automatic error detection signal (AUTED) is ON. The normal error detection is prioritized when the error detection signal (ERD) is ON.

  • Page 664: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.13 Automatic Error Detection 14.13.4 Relation with Other Functions  Milling mode This function is disabled for a movement command which is in the milling mode.  Tool compensation For tool compensation or nose R compensation, the corner angle is calculated for the compensated block. ...

  • Page 665: External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.14 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation 14.14 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation External machine coordinate system compensation is executed by setting compensation data (absolute amount) in the PLC file register (R) for each axis. Thus, the compensation timing is when PLC rewrites file register (R) compensation data. Necessary condition, timing, etc., are set by user PLC.

  • Page 666: Tool Life Management (Machining Center System)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) 14.15.1 Outline Tool life management function enables uniform quality machining by managing tool life and exchanging tools at proper timing. This function manages tool life by comparing the time (or the number of cuttings) of each tool which is set before machining and the cumulative cutting hours (or the cumulative number of cuttings).
  • Page 667 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) This section describes PLC control of the tool life management function. Tool life management data can be registered on the tool life management screen. For details, refer to "Instruction Manual". Tool life management screen Updates tool life status such as cumulative cutting hours and cumulative number of cuttings...

  • Page 668: Tool Data Flow (R Register)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) 14.15.2 Tool Data Flow (R register) Tool life management registers contain the spare tool data (R11800 to R11823) and the active tool data (R11824 to R11847). The tool data specified by a T command is output to the data area for spare tool.
  • Page 669 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) Note (1) Details of the file registers for the tool data flag/status of the spare tool and that of the active tool are as follows: Tool length compensation data format, 0 to 2 Tool radius compensation data format, 0 to 2 Tool life management method, 0 to 2...

  • Page 670: Operation When A T Command (Tool Command) Is Executed

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) 14.15.3 Operation When a T Command (Tool Command) is Executed When a T command is issued, the specified number in the command is handled as a tool No., then T code data (R536, R537) and the "T function strobe"...

  • Page 671: Operation When Spindle Tool Is Changed

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) 14.15.4 Operation When Spindle Tool is Changed After a spindle tool is changed, usage of the tool is monitored by cumulating the number of cuttings or the cutting hours. When the spindle tool has reached the end of its tool life, the "Tool life over"...

  • Page 672: Operation When A Tool Has Reached The End Of Its Tool Life

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) 14.15.5 Operation When a Tool Has Reached the End of Its Tool Life When the tool exceeds the estimated tool life (hours) or the estimated number of cuttings, the "Tool life over" signal (XC2E) is output.

  • Page 673: User Plc Processing

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.15 Tool Life Management (Machining Center System) 14.15.6 User PLC Processing The flowcharts below show the examples of PLC processing of the tool change by a T command and by a tool change command (e.g.

  • Page 674: Tool Life Management (Lathe System)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.16 Tool Life Management (Lathe System) 14.16 Tool Life Management (Lathe System) 14.16.1 Outline Tool life management function enables uniform quality machining by managing tool life and exchanging tools at proper timing. This function manages tool life by comparing the time (or the number of cuttings) of each tool which is set before machining and the cumulative cutting hours (or the cumulative number of cuttings).

  • Page 675: Operation When A Tool Has Reached The End Of Its Tool Life

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.16 Tool Life Management (Lathe System) 14.16.2 Operation When a Tool Has Reached the End of Its Tool Life When the cumulative cutting hours has reached estimated tool life (hours) or when the cumulative number of cuttings has reached estimated number of cuttings, the "Tool life over"...

  • Page 676: Change The Area Of Stored Stroke Limit I

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.17 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I 14.17 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I 14.17.1 Explanation of Function This function allows you to change the area of stored stroke limit I to be the one set in R registers for each axis. Turning ON the "Stored stroke limit I : Change request"...
  • Page 677 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.17 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I  Available R registers Listed below are the R registers that can be used to set the area of stored stroke limit I. Choose an R register from which eight consecutive R registers are available.

  • Page 678: Usage Example

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.17 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I 14.17.2 Usage Example Illustrated below is an operation example when you change the area of stored stroke limit I for X and Y axes using the stored stroke limit I area change at a T command.
  • Page 679 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.17 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I [X axis] R register for setting R9800 : 0x5EE0 R9802 : 0x1200 Change info not specified R9801 : 0xFFF8 R9803 : 0x007A (OT- : - 50.0 OT+ : 800.0) Stored stroke limit 1 change request...

  • Page 680: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.17 Change the Area of Stored Stroke Limit I 14.17.3 Precautions (1) For an axis whose parameter "#2190 OT_Rreg" is set to "0", or an axis whose prohibition area includes any R register outside the user area, the stored stroke limit I area coincides with the settings of the parameters "#2013 OT-"...

  • Page 681: Interference Check Iii

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III 14.18 Interference Check III 14.18.1 Outline Interference check III is designed to prevent interference between interfering objects by checking the relative relation of the interfering objects. One interfering object can be defined with 1 to 16 solids.
  • Page 682 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III Term Details An object which forms the interfering object. Solid You can select a cuboid and cylinder for the shape. Up to 256 solids can be defined in the entire system. An object comprised of 1 to 16 solids.

  • Page 683: Instructions For Use

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III 14.18.2 Instructions for Use Follow the procedure below to perform the interference check. (1) Set "1" in the base Common Parameter (#1488 ITF3 valid). (2) Create the solid and interfering object definition file (OBSTACLE.DAT). With the solid and interfering object definition file (OBSTACLE.DAT), up to 256 solids and up to 128 interfering objects are defined.

  • Page 684: Interference Alarm Area And Interference Warning Area

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III 14.18.3 Interference Alarm Area and Interference Warning Area Set an area where interference must be avoided surely (interference alarm area), and an area where interference should be mitigated (interference warning area) for each solid.
  • Page 685 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III [Operation example] Interfering object 1 Interfering object 1 Interfering Interfering object 2 object 2 Warning Interference Feedrate clamp Alarm stop Torque limit Interference alarm area Interference warning area IB-1501668-B...

  • Page 686: Interfering Object Selection

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III 14.18.4 Interfering Object Selection Select 16 interfering objects to use in the interference check III with system variables or R register. When selecting an interfering object, specify the specification of the selected interfering object and interfering model coordinate system offset 1.
  • Page 687 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III Setting range (unit) System vari- R register Item Details Upper: System variable able Lower: R register 2nd interfering object Select an interfering object that you do 0 to 65535 (decimal) Interference check III: not check the interference with the 2nd...

  • Page 688: Interfering Object Data Enable Command (Y769, X771) And Mode Valid Command (Y76A, X772)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III 14.18.5 Interfering Object Data Enable Command (Y769, X771) and Mode Valid Command (Y76A, X772) Interfering object data enable command The interfering object selection made by system variables or R register is enabled with G code or PLC device. For the details on G codes, refer to the programming manual.
  • Page 689 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III Mode enable command While the "Interference check III: Interference check III mode" signal (Y76A) is ON after the "Interference check III: Enable interfering object selection data" signal (Y769) or the enable interference check III setting data command (G186) is executed, the interference check between interfering objects is performed.

  • Page 690: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III 14.18.6 Relation with Other Functions  High-speed simple program check Even though machine lock is applied to all axes during the high-speed simple program check, the check is performed. During the high-speed simple program check, the operation error (M03 1001) may occur at a position different from actual operation.

  • Page 691: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III 14.18.7 Precautions (1) For the operation error (M03 0003), if the interfering object has deviated from the interference warning area, you can can- cel the alarm by resetting the NC or turning OFF the "Interference check III: mode" signal. (2) During the operation error (M03 0003), a torque limit and feedrate clamp are constantly performed.
  • Page 692 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.18 Interference Check III (17) The unit to be used in the solid and interfering object definition file (OBSTACLE.DAT) is millimeters (3 digits after the dec- imal point) fixed. (18) In the interference check III, interference is checked with 0.1 µm unit regardless of the control unit. (19) At the occurrence of the operation error (M03 0001), all the axes in the part system in which the alarm has occurred will stop.

  • Page 693: Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop 14.19.1 Outline When an alarm occurs for an axis, this function performs an alarm stop only for the axes in a machine group to which the axis belongs.

  • Page 694: Function Enabling Conditions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop 14.19.2 Function Enabling Conditions The following settings are required to enable this function. (1) Set "1" in "#1471 mgralmstp (Enable machine groupwise alarm stop)". (2) Set the machine group number as follows. [Servo axis] ...

  • Page 695: Basic Operation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop 14.19.3 Basic Operation  When an alarm occurs for an axis, this function decelerates and stops the axes in a machine group where the axis belongs. Operations of the other machine groups are given below.

  • Page 696: Operation After Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop 14.19.4 Operation after Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop Operations of another machine groups after machine groupwise alarm stop  The allowance of the automatic operation by the cycle start can be switched. ...
  • Page 697 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop When an alarm occurs at S1 spindle, the axes/spindles which belong to the machine group 1 and 2 perform the alarm stop. However, other PLC axes are able to continue the operation without the alarm stop. Stop Optical Stop...

  • Page 698: Target Alarms

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop 14.19.5 Target Alarms Servo/Spindle alarm Alarm class Resetting methods Alarm No. Name 0010 Insufficient voltage (After removing the cause of the alarm, re- 0016 Init mag pole pos detect err set the alarm by turning the NC power ON 0017 A/D converter error...
  • Page 699 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop Alarm class Resetting methods Alarm No. Name 004C Current err mag pole estim (After removing the cause of the alarm, re- 004E NC command mode error set the alarm by inputting the NC RESET 004F Instantaneous power interrupt...

  • Page 700: Usage Example

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop 14.19.6 Usage Example Usage example 1 for lathe  When the machine group is set by channel: When an alarm occurs at PLC2 axis of machine group 2, the axes in the machine group 2 where the alarm occurred are stopped.
  • Page 701 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop Usage example 2 for lathe  When a number of machine groups are set in one channel: When an alarm occurs at PLC2 axis of machine group 2, the axes in the group 2 where the alarm occurred are stopped. However, other axes of machine group 1 are able to continue the operation.
  • Page 702 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop Usage example 3 for lathe  When a number of machine groups are set in one part system: When an alarm occurs at U1 axis of machine group 2, the axes in the group 1 are able to continue the operation although the axes in the machine group 2 where the alarm occurred are stopped.
  • Page 703 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop Usage example 4 for lathe  When a machine group number is set across a number of optical channels: When an alarm occurs at Z2 axis of machine group 1, the axes which belong to the group 1 perform the alarm stop. However, the other axis, PLC1 is able to continue the operation without the alarm stop because it belongs to the group 2.
  • Page 704 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop Usage example 5 for lathe  When a machine group number is set to "0": When an alarm occurs at PLC1 axis, the axes in the machine group 1 and those which are set to "0" and "FF" in the spindle machine group numbers perform the alarm stop.
  • Page 705 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop Condition  NC type: Lathe [Base system parameters] Item 1001(PR) SYS_ON System validation setup 1002(PR) axisno Number of axes [Basic common parameter] Item data 1039 spinno Number of spindles [Base axis specification parameters]...
  • Page 706 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop Usage example for machining center with 2 part systems  When a number of machine groups are set in one channel: When an alarm occurs at Z2 axis of machine group 2, the axes in the group 2 where the alarm occurred are stopped. However, other axes of machine group 1 are able to continue the operation.

  • Page 707: Machine Group-Based Plc Interlock

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop 14.19.7 Machine Group-Based PLC Interlock  Interlock is enabled by turning ON "Machine group-based alarm stop: Machine group-based PLC interlock signal (GQMEG1: YBE0)" as follows. (The spindles are stopped with the rotation speed "0".) - The machine group-based PLC interlock can be switched to either all axes interlock or machine group-based interlock.

  • Page 708: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.19 Machine Group-Based Alarm Stop [Timing chart of machine group-based PLC interlock] Machine group-based alarm stop: Machine group-based PLC interlock (GQMEG1: YBE0) PLC output signal PLC emergency stop (QMEG: YC2C) Machine group-based alarm PLC input sig- stop: Machine group-based PLC...

  • Page 709: Diagnosis Data Output

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.20 Diagnosis Data Output 14.20 Diagnosis Data Output 14.20.1 Outline Diagnosis data output is a function designed to output the information on when to exchange the life-limited parts of the NC and its peripherals.

  • Page 710: Alarm Message Display

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display 14.21 Alarm Message Display The details of the alarms which occur during the sequence (user PLC) process can be displayed on the setting and display unit. Up to four alarm messages can be displayed simultaneously on the alarm diagnosis screen.
  • Page 711 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display  R type interface This interface applies to file registers R2556 to R2559. The numeric value (binary) contained in each of the R registers indicates the position of the message to be displayed in the message table. The message is cleared by setting the R register to "0".

  • Page 712: Linking With Multi-Project

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display 14.21.2 Linking with Multi-Project Create messages by using a text file format or PLC development software (GX Developer). This chapter explains the operations that are performed when the PLC message files created by the PLC development software (GX Developer) are stored in multiple projects while the multi-project function is valid.
  • Page 713 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display Parameters related to PLC alarm messages Switching the parameters related to PLC alarm messages is common to all projects. When the parameters described in "Parameters" are set, the same setting will be applied to all projects. Interface The temporary memory (F) and the file register (R) are common devices among projects (the devices which are affected by the access from multiple projects).
  • Page 714 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display Message table When the message files are stored in multiple projects, one message table will be created by combining the alarm message data in the message files of each project. When the alarm message data with the same index are written in multiple projects, the alarm message of the message file stored in the project with the small project No.
  • Page 715 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display Supplementary information display The supplementary information can be displayed after the message regardless of the F type or R type. (Refer to "Supplementary information display" in this chapter.) The supplementary information indicates the contents of data register which is specified individually when creating alarm messages.

  • Page 716: Screen Display

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display 14.21.3 Screen Display Screen display depends on the message type as described below.  Alarm message type Up to 4 sets of the category, message (up to 46 characters) and the supplementary information can be displayed. Example of setting and display unit display A maximum of 4 messages can be displayed at a time...

  • Page 717: Message Creation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display [Supplementary information display (Only for alarm message type)] Supplementary information can be displayed following the message to be displayed regardless of the F or R type. (dn1 to dn4 of the F type and R type.) For example, one typical alarm message is prepared and supplementary information can be used to indicate the alarm source or cause.

  • Page 718: Parameters

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display 14.21.5 Parameters  PLC alarm message selection parameter [Bit selection parameter screen] # (6450) Data ( 0 0: PLC alarm message display in user PLC Use No. 6450. The operation is as the following depending on the bit state of the bit selection #6450.
  • Page 719 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.21 Alarm Message Display  F or R type selection parameter Set the parameter on the bit selection screen of PLC parameter (setup para). [Bit selection parameter screen] # (6450) Data ( 0 0: Alarm message invalid.

  • Page 720: Operator Message Display

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.22 Operator Message Display 14.22 Operator Message Display When a condition to inform the operator of a message occurs, an operator message can be displayed independently of an alarm message. A maximum of 55 characters can be displayed for the operator message in one line on the PLC message screen.

  • Page 721: Interface

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.22 Operator Message Display 14.22.1 Interface The operator message display interface is available in the two types: F type in which temporary memory F is used for message display request and R type in which file register (R) is used for message display request. Either type is selected by using a parameter.

  • Page 722: Linking With Multi-Project

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.22 Operator Message Display 14.22.2 Linking with Multi-Project Create messages by using a text file format or PLC development software (GX Developer). This chapter explains the operations in case that the PLC message files created by the PLC development software (GX Developer) are stored in multiple projects when multi-project function is valid.
  • Page 723 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.22 Operator Message Display Parameters related to operator messages Switching parameters related to operator messages are common among all projects. When the parameters described in "Parameters" are set, the same setting will be applied to all projects. Interface The temporary memory (F) and the file register (R) are common devices among projects (the devices which are affected by the access from multiple projects).
  • Page 724 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.22 Operator Message Display Message table When the message file is stored in multiple projects, one message table will be created by combining the operator message data in the message file of each project. When the operator message data with the same index in multiple projects are written, the message of the message file stored in the project with small project No.
  • Page 725 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.22 Operator Message Display Supplementary information display The supplementary information can be displayed after the message regardless of the F type or R type. (Refer to "Supplementary information display" in this chapter.) For the supplementary information, the contents of each data register specified in alarm message preparation are displayed.

  • Page 726: Screen Display

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.22 Operator Message Display 14.22.3 Screen Display Up to 4 sets of the category, message (up to 55 characters) and the classification No. can be displayed. When the message cannot be in one line, it is displayed over two lines. If the alarm message at the screen bottom is longer than 40 characters, the display method can be selected by the parameter "#11021 PLC mesg dip type", as to whether to display the first 40 characters or divide the message into two.

  • Page 727: Operator Message Preparation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.22 Operator Message Display 14.22.4 Operator Message Preparation Create messages by using a text file format or PLC development software (GX Developer). According to the description format, set the number of characters for one message and the number of messages to be prepared, then prepare message data.

  • Page 728: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.22 Operator Message Display 14.22.6 Relation with Other Functions Macro alarm message (#3000, #3006) The macro alarm message is displayed in the first line of the operator message area. If you use R2560 to display an operator message, the message which is output later will be displayed. While the macro alarm message is displayed, up to three operator messages in F or R type can be displayed.

  • Page 729: Plc Switches

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches 14.23 PLC Switches Similar function to machine operation switches can be provided by using the controller setting and display unit. The switches can be turned ON and OFF from the PLC Switch screen or the user PLC. The name of the switch can be given arbitrarily. For M800VW and M800VS Series, 32 points of PLC switches are provided by default.
  • Page 730 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches Note (1) When you press , the previous 32 items appear and when you press , the next 32 items appear. In either PAGE PAGE case, the switch No. movement cursor moves to the first item. When the switch No.1 (#1) is displayed, the cursor does not move.

  • Page 731: Explanation Of Operation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches 14.23.2 Explanation of Operation To turn ON or OFF a switch, press the "setting valid" key, move to arbitrary No. with the cursor of #No., then press "ON" or "OFF"...
  • Page 732 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches Corresponding device Corresponding device Switch Switch Output Output Input X Input X verse Y verse Y X1C40 Y1C40 Y1C60 X1C50 Y1C50 Y1C70 X1C41 Y1C41 Y1C61 X1C51 Y1C51 Y1C71 X1C42 Y1C42 Y1C62 X1C52 Y1C52 Y1C72 X1C43 Y1C43 Y1C63...

  • Page 733: Signal Processing

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches 14.23.3 Signal Processing Switch input signal Status display signal X680 Y680 X680 Y680 Y681 X681 X681 Y681 X682 Y682 X682 Y682 Y683 X683 X683 Y683 Y684 Validity External switch ...
  • Page 734 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches The following shows an example of operation of reversing signal Y from the user PLC. Two-point switch  When two opposite switches, chip conveyer manual and chip conveyer automatic, are provided Chip conveyor manual X68E X68F Y6CE...
  • Page 735 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches Three-point switch  When three opposite switches 17, 18, and 19 are provided Y690 X692 X690 X691 X690 X691 X692 Y6D0 X690 turns OFF when Y6D0 turns ON. X690 X691 X692 Y691 X692...
  • Page 736 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches External switch and PLC switch  When an external optional stop switch (X14) is provided X14 X683 X14 X683 X14 X683 M8 X14 X683 M9 Y6C3 X683 Y683 Under sequence control in the above example, the switch marks on the PLC switch screen can be operated from both external and PLC switches.

  • Page 737: Switch Name Preparation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches 14.23.4 Switch Name Preparation Prepare PLC switch names by using a text file format or PLC development software (GX Developer). According to the description format, set the number of characters for one switch name and the number of points for switches, then prepare switch name data.

  • Page 738: Linking With Multi-Project

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches 14.23.6 Linking with Multi-Project This chapter explains the operations in case that the PLC message files created by the PLC development software (GX Developer) are stored in multiple projects when multi-project function is valid. When the message files are stored in multiple projects, the combination of the PLC switch name written in the message file in each project will be displayed.
  • Page 739 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.23 PLC Switches Therefore, when the PLC switches are used in multi-project environment, the method to use the switches by dividing them per project in advance is recommended as follows: [Example procedure to create] (1) Decide the switches to use for each project Project 1: Use the switches #1 to #10...

  • Page 740: Got Connection

    14.24 GOT Connection 14.24 GOT Connection 14.24.1 Outline This function connects and communicates between Mitsubishi Electric general graphic operation terminal (GOT) and Mitsubishi Electric CNC. Only GOT2000 series can be connected. Soft GOT 2000 can be connected, too. There are two connection methods for GOT connection, Ethernet connection and CC-Link connection.

  • Page 741: Available Got Function

    GOT2000 Series User’s Manual (Monitor) SH-081196 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Electric Products) SH-081197 GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1) SH-081198ENG GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2) SH-081199ENG GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputers, MODBUS/Fieldbus Products, Peripherals) SH-081200ENG...

  • Page 742: Pallet Program Registration

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.25 Pallet Program Registration 14.25 Pallet Program Registration The pallet program registration function allows machining programs to be registered to each pallet of the automatic pallet changer (hereinafter APC) and supports setups of the machining. Operation search for the registered program is executed by the PLC ladder using the external function.
  • Page 743 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.25 Pallet Program Registration NC -> PLC interface signal Signal name Device Standard pallet registration screen Pallet 4 page registration screen Pallet program registration Ext. workpiece coordinate trans- X758 Spare fer completion Signal abbre- Contact...
  • Page 744 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.25 Pallet Program Registration Screen data is output to the following PLC devices. Signal name Device Standard pallet registration screen Pallet 4 page registration screen Pallet program search valid/invalid state Pallet program search valid/invalid state R2100 0: Invalid 1: Valid...
  • Page 745 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.25 Pallet Program Registration Signal name Device Standard pallet registration screen Pallet 4 page registration screen R2133 Spare Spare Pallet 2 0° Machining program device No. R2134 Spare 0: Memory 1: HD 2: DS 3: FD 4: Memory card Pallet 2 0°...
  • Page 746 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.25 Pallet Program Registration PLC -> NC interface signal Signal name Device Standard pallet registration screen Pallet 4 page registration screen Pallet program registration: In APC execution Pallet program registration: In APC execution Y72E 0: In place 1: In execution 0: In place 1: In execution...
  • Page 747 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.25 Pallet Program Registration Signal name Device Standard pallet registration screen Pallet 4 page registration screen Pallet information in the machine Pallet information in the machine bit0 :ON - Pallet 1 in the machine bit0 :ON - Pallet 1 in the machine R4100 bit1 :ON - Pallet 2 in the machine...
  • Page 748 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.25 Pallet Program Registration Precautions (1) Only the program with a file name using decimal number (1 to 99999999) can be registered. Program in HD, DS, FD and memory card can be registered besides one in NC memory; however, the program is limited to the one in root directory.

  • Page 749: Simple Inclined Surface Machining Command

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.26 Simple Inclined Surface Machining Command 14.26 Simple Inclined Surface Machining Command 14.26.1 Outline In a lathe with three orthogonal axes and one rotary axis on the tool side, this function enables simultaneous 4-axis control milling on an inclined surface along workpiece end face.

  • Page 750: How To Apply Tool Axis Rotation Angle Compensation Amount (G174)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.26 Simple Inclined Surface Machining Command 14.26.2 How to Apply Tool Axis Rotation Angle Compensation Amount (G174) If you want to perform simple tool center point control (G174) or tool axis direction control (G53.1) using a tool that is not parallel to Z (-) of the machine coordinate system while the tool axis rotation angle is at 0 degree, the simple tool center point control (G174) or tool axis direction control (G53.1) can be implemented by specifying the tool axis rotation angle compensation amount (offset angle).
  • Page 751 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.26 Simple Inclined Surface Machining Command When you use any tool with the hexagon turret, the offset angle is set as follows:  When the tool rotary axis's rotation direction is set to CCW, the tool A's offset angle is set to 90 degrees. (Refer to (C) in the following figure.) For the R registers (R2634 to R2635), designate the reference tool's offset angle, 30 degrees (30000).
  • Page 752 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.26 Simple Inclined Surface Machining Command [Setting of tool axis rotation angle compensation amount (when "#1450 5axis_Spec/bit1" is "1")] Basic position rotation angle X(+) Z (-) direction Spindle 0° Z(+) Tool "A"...

  • Page 753: Combination With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.26 Simple Inclined Surface Machining Command 14.26.3 Combination with Other Functions Arbitrary axis exchange (G140, G141, G142) Refer to the chapter "14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter". Inclined axis control When the inclined axis control is active (YC35:ON), do not issue a command that causes the inclined axis to move during Simple inclined surface control (G176) or Simple tool center point control (G174).
  • Page 754 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.26 Simple Inclined Surface Machining Command  Counter display during manual feed [Inclined surface coordinate position counter] The inclined surface coordinate position counter indicates a machine position relative to the feature coordinate system. While inclined surface control command is OFF, the counter indicates a machine position relative to the work coordinate system.

  • Page 755: 3-Dimensional Manual Feed

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.1 Outline By selecting the hypothetical coordinate system to be machined, axis can be moved with manual feed (JOG, HANDLE or INCREMENTAL) in the coordinate system with the 3-dimensional manual feed function. When a travel command is executed in the hypothetical coordinate system, the NC can move more than one axis according to the tool orientation and table inclination, which facilitates the setup process.

  • Page 756: System Configuration

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.2 System Configuration Machine configuration This function is available in the machine whose orthogonal axis is installed with ISO polarity. For combined type, the rotary axis can be installed with both ISO polarity and non-ISO polarity. For details, refer to "14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter".
  • Page 757 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed Hypothetical coordinate system There are three types of hypothetical coordinate system: table coordinate system, feature coordinate systemand tool axis coordinate system.  Tool axis coordinate system On table tilt type machines, axes move with the rotation of the rotary axis in the coordinate system fixed on the table.

  • Page 758: Detailed Specifications

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.3 Detailed Specifications When a hypothetical coordinate system is selected using a PLC signal during manual feed (jog, incremental or handle mode) or at handle interrupt in automatic operation, manual feed can be performed in the selected coordinate system. This function has two feed modes: "Feed in hypothetical coordinate system"...

  • Page 759: Operation Example Of Feed In Hypothetical Coordinate System

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.4 Operation Example of Feed in Hypothetical Coordinate System A linear axis travel command is processed as "Feed in hypothetical coordinate system". Manual feed is performed in a hypothetically defined coordinate system using three linear axes.
  • Page 760 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed (3) Select the tool axis coordinate system (YD1B/1, YD1C/0, YD1D/0) as a hypothetical coordinate system. (4) Travel in the TX, TY and TZ directions of the tool axis coordinate system. X+1.motion Y+1.motion Z+1.motion...

  • Page 761: Coordinate System Selection - Table Coordinate System Example

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.4.2 Coordinate System Selection - Table Coordinate System Example Axis travel is performed in each of the X, Y and Z directions on the rotating table surface. The below example is the operation with the 1st handle in the table tilt type B-C axis configuration.

  • Page 762: Coordinate System Selection - Feature Coordinate System Example

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.4.3 Coordinate System Selection - Feature Coordinate System Example Axis travel is performed in each of the X, Y and Z directions of the feature coordinate system that has been defined for Workpiece installation error compensation or Inclined surface machining function.

  • Page 763: Rotation With Tool Tip As Center

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.5 Rotation with Tool Tip as Center A rotary axis travel command is processed as "Rotation with the tool tip as the center". Manual feed is carried out using the rotary axes and the three linear axes so that the positional relationship between the workpiece and tool tip can be kept.
  • Page 764 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed (7) Rotate around the C axis by 90°. X(-) C(+) Travel in the X and Y directions Y(+) without moving the tool tip, according to the rotation angle. Z(+) Y(+) X(+)

  • Page 765: Machine Configuration - Table Tilt Example

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.5.2 Machine Configuration - Table Tilt Example The tool moves so that the positional relationship between the workpiece and tool tip is kept. The below example is the operation with the 1st handle in the table tilt type B-C axis configuration. [Operation step] (1) Select the handle mode.

  • Page 766: Tool Length Offset Amount

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.5.3 Tool Length Offset Amount The length (tool length offset amount) from the tool tip to the holder edge is required for the tool to move keeping the positional relationship between a workpiece and the tool tip in "Rotation with the tool tip as the center".

  • Page 767: Position Display Counter

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.7 Position Display Counter Position display counter indicates as follows during the 3-dimensional manual feed.  Tool axis travel amount This counter indicates the tool's travel amount in the tool axis coordinate system. Note, however, that this counter is not updated in one of the following cases.
  • Page 768 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed  Manual interruption amount While the inclined surface machining command is enabled, this counter indicates a manual interruption amount in the feature coordinate system. If a hypothetical coordinate system is being selected while the inclined surface machining command is disabled, a position in the selected hypothetical coordinate system is displayed.

  • Page 769: Signal List

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.8 Signal List 14.27.8.1 Hypothetical Coordinate System Selection For each manual mode and handle to use, this signal is used to select the hypothetical coordinate system, in which the 3- dimensional manual feed is carried out.
  • Page 770 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed Con- Signal ab- Signal name tact breviation 3-dimensional manual feed (2nd handle) MH2CT YD1E YE5B YFBE Y10DE Y121E Y135E Y149E Y15DE in tool axis coordinate system 3-dimensional manual feed (2nd handle) MH2CB YD1F...

  • Page 771: Selected Coordinate System Output

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.8.2 Selected Coordinate System Output For each manual mode and handle to use, this signal is used to inform of the hypothetical coordinate system in which the 3- dimensional manual feed is carried out.
  • Page 772 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed Con- Signal ab- Signal name tact breviation Tool axis coordinate system in 3-dimen- MH1ST XD1B XE5B XF9B X10DB X121B X135B X149B X15DB sional manual feed (1st handle) Table coordinate system in 3-dimensional MH1SB XD1C...
  • Page 773 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed Con- Signal ab- Signal name tact breviation Tool axis coordinate system in 3-dimen- MH2ST XD1E XE5E XF9E X10DE X121E X135E X149E X15DE sional manual feed (2nd handle) Table coordinate system in 3-dimensional MH2SB XD1F...
  • Page 774 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed Con- Signal ab- Signal name tact breviation Tool axis coordinate system in 3-dimen- MH3ST XD21 XE61 XFA1 X10E1 X1221 X1361 X14A1 X15E1 sional manual feed (3rd handle) Table coordinate system in 3-dimensional MH3SB XD22...

  • Page 775: Tool Center Point Rotation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.8.3 Tool Center Point Rotation Con- Signal ab- Signal name tact breviation Tool center point rotation TCPRC YD27 YE67 YFA7 Y10E7 Y1227 Y1367 Y14A7 Y15E7 [Function] This signal informs the operation of the rotation axis of 3-dimensional manual feed (JOG/incremental/handle).

  • Page 776: Tool Center Point Rotation Output

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.8.4 Tool Center Point Rotation Output Con- Signal ab- Signal name tact breviation In tool center point rotation TCPRS XD27 XE67 XFA7 X10E7 X1227 X1367 X14A7 X15E7 [Function] This signal informs the operation of the rotation axis of 3-dimensional manual feed (JOG/incremental/handle).
  • Page 777 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed (7) Feed axis The axis Nos. specified for the 3-dimensional manual feed (jog, incremental or handle mode) are the same as those for normal manual feed. However, the 3-dimensional manual feed is enabled only for the axes that have been set in the rotary axis configuration parameters.
  • Page 778 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed (8) Spindle position control (spindle/C axis) When using the axis set for Spindle/C axis as a rotary axis to perform tool center point rotation control, start the 3-dimensional manual feed in C axis mode.

  • Page 779: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.10 Relation with Other Functions 14.27.10.1 Relation with Rotary Axis Angle Designation (Mechanical Axis Specification) To perform the 3-dimensional manual feed for mechanical axis specifications, write the rotary axis angle to the R register via user PLC program.

  • Page 780: Relation With Tool Handle Feed & Interrupt Function

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.10.2 Relation with Tool Handle Feed & Interrupt Function The "3-dimensional manual feed" function can be used together with the "Tool handle feed & interrupt" function. When the conditions for the both functions are met, the 3-dimensional manual feed is given priority.

  • Page 781: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed 14.27.10.3 Relation with Other Functions  When the conditions for the 3-dimensional manual feed are not met, and no alarm is output, the standard jog feed, incre- mental feed, handle feed, handle interruption and tool handle feed &...
  • Page 782 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.27 3-Dimensional Manual Feed  The setting of the rotary axis configuration parameter "#7912 NO_MANUAL" (Selection of the "3-dimensional manual feed" function) can be changed using the "Parameter file input" or "Parameter input by program" function or system variables. ...

  • Page 783: Applying The Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter 14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter On a multi-tasking machine, one rotary tool may be shared with multiple part systems. In this case, arbitrary axis exchange control and mixed control which an arbitrary axis between part systems can be exchanged freely are used.
  • Page 784 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter You can check the rotary axis configuration parameters being applied with rotary axis configuration parameter output (R656). If there are no applying rotary axis configuration parameters, NC notifies "0" on the rotary axis configuration parameter No. (R656/low-order 8 bits).
  • Page 785 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter  PLC signal method ("#1450 5axis_Spec/bit2" is "1") When "Rotary axis configuration parameter switch request signal (R2615/bit8)" turns ON (0 -> 1), configuration set in "Configuration No.
  • Page 786 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter Timing chart Machining program N1 G28; N2 M** ; N3 G68.2 ; Configuration No. of rotary axis configuration prameter (R2615/low-order 8 bits) “Rotary axis configuration parameter switch request”...
  • Page 787 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter Operation when the rotary axis is set with non-ISO polarity For combined type 5-axis machine, the following functions can be used in the machine whose rotary axis is installed with either ISO polarity or non-ISO polarity.
  • Page 788 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter Precautions (1) After turning ON the power, resetting the NC, emergency stop, or issuing the arbitrary axis exchange control (G140/ G141/G142) or mixed control I/II command, the state will be that rotary axis configuration parameter is not applied. There- fore, issue the function targeted for the combination after applying the rotary axis configuration parameter.
  • Page 789 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.28 Applying the Rotary Axis Configuration Parameter (8) When the rotation center error compensation function is used, note the following conditions as well. (a) Precautions when the parameter "#1450 5axis Spec/bit5" (Rotation center error compensation: restraint of machine movement) is set to "1".

  • Page 790: Real-Time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.29 Real-Time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) 14.29 Real-Time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) 14.29.1 Outline This function estimates the inertia (or workpiece weight) of mechanical system and changes the speed control gain automatically according to the estimation results to suppress mechanical vibration.

  • Page 791: Function Enabling Conditions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.29 Real-Time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) 14.29.2 Function Enabling Conditions In order to utilize this function, the following conditions shall be met in every servo axis and spindle motor. This function allows us to determine whether making the function valid or invalid in every axis and spindle.
  • Page 792 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.29 Real-Time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) When meeting the above valid conditions, the speed control gain is switched in response to inertia.  In case that machine resonance is induced when mounting a workpiece, set the resonance filter in advance. (Related parameters: #2233, #2238, #2246, #2287, #2288 (for servo axis), #13034,#13038,#13046,#13087,#13088 (for spindle)) ...

  • Page 793: Description Of Operation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.29 Real-Time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) 14.29.3 Description of Operation  When the function of real-time tuning 1 is validated, the speed control gain is switched according to the estimated inertia size.

  • Page 794: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.29 Real-Time Tuning 1 (Speed Gain) 14.29.4 Precautions (1) For linear motors, set the value of weight inertia or larger in "#2237 JL (load inertia scale)". If the value smaller than that of weight inertia is set, the speed control gain switching becomes invalid but the value which is not 100% may be displayed in the "Gain mag."...

  • Page 795: Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) 14.30.1 Outline This function estimates the inertia of workpiece and optimizes the operation acceleration/deceleration time constant automatically according to the estimation results.

  • Page 796: Function Enabling Conditions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) 14.30.2 Function Enabling Conditions To use this function, it is necessary to satisfy the [Condition 1] and [Condition 2] as shown below. [Condition 1]: Parameter conditions which enable this function for the ON/OFF of the command mode and high-accuracy control mode.

  • Page 797: Description Of Operation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) 14.30.3 Description of Operation The derivation of optimum time constant and the timing for switching to optimum time constant of this function are described below.
  • Page 798 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) Also, when the following conditions are satisfied, the acceleration/deceleration time constant is switched to the maximum value of switching time constant "tmax" or the minimum value of switching time constant "tmin". ...
  • Page 799 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) Timing for switching to optimum time constant When this function is enabled, the timing for switching the target acceleration/deceleration time constant to the optimum time constant is after the smoothing zero of the target axis for switching the time constant.
  • Page 800 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) The acceleration/deceleration time constant is not switched in the following cases.  When the derivative calculation of the optimum time constant is not completed. (The derivative calculation of the optimum time constant will be executed at the next timing for the switch, and then the acceleration/deceleration time constant will be changed.) ...

  • Page 801: Usage Example

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) 14.30.4 Usage Example This function commands with the PLC signal after the "Function Enabling Conditions" are satisfied.  Acceleration/deceleration time constant in automatic switchover This is a function to switch the acceleration/deceleration time constant to the optimum time constant automatically.
  • Page 802 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) Acceleration/deceleration time constant in manual switchover When turning ON the signal "Real-time tuning 2: acceleration/deceleration time constant in manual switchover (RT2CHGM:YD0D)", the acceleration/deceleration time constant can be switched to the optimum time constant manually. This signal is available only at the rising edge.

  • Page 803: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.30 Real-Time Tuning 2 (Rapid Traverse Time Constant) Reset acceleration/deceleration time constant When turning ON "Real-time tuning 2: Acceleration/deceleration time constant reset (RT2RST:YD0E)", the acceleration/ deceleration time constant is switched to the maximum value of switching time constant "tmax". (Refer to "Relation between the estimated inertia ratio and the optimum time constant") This signal is available only at the rising edge.

  • Page 804: Constant Torque Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.31 Constant Torque Control 14.31 Constant Torque Control 14.31.1 Outline  Constant torque control By setting "Constant torque control request axis" signal to ON from PLC, the servo motor of the designated axis outputs torque set by the parameter in a constant direction.

  • Page 805: Description Of Operation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.31 Constant Torque Control 14.31.2 Description of Operation Constant torque control Constant torque control outputs a constant amount of torque in a single direction in accordance with the value configured by "2296 SV096 (TQC) (Constant torque stopper control)".
  • Page 806 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.31 Constant Torque Control Droop cancel under constant torque control The droop cancel under constant torque control function enables position droop produced during constant torque control to be canceled without moving the axis. Make sure the axis is in abutment with the workpiece before outputting the command for the droop cancel under constant torque control.
  • Page 807 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.31 Constant Torque Control Proportional torque stopper control Proportional torque stopper control outputs a constant amount of torque in a pressing direction in accordance with the value configured by "2296 SV096 (TQC) (Constant torque stopper control)". When position droop is produced, torque that is proportional to the position droop is generated in the pressing direction to maintain the pressing position.

  • Page 808: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.31 Constant Torque Control 14.31.3 Relation with Other Functions  Torque limitation skip Outputting the torque skip command to an axis while the constant torque control or proportional torque stopper control is in operation results in the generation of a program error (P595).

  • Page 809: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.31 Constant Torque Control 14.31.4 Precautions (1) The NC command position and feedback position are different while constant torque control is in operation. Do not apply constant torque control to axes actually processing workpieces. Set "2296 SV096 (TQC) (Constant torque stopper con- trol)"...

  • Page 810: Circular Feed In Manual Mode

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode 14.32.1 Outline By specifying a hypothetical coordinate on the machine coordinate system from the user PLC, oblique linear interpolation or circular interpolation is executed with jog feed, handle feed, manual rapid traverse or incremental feed of the two axes designated by plane selection.
  • Page 811 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode Operation The following shows how to enable the circular feed in manual mode. (1) Select either JOG mode or handle mode. (2) Set the coordinates of reference point (h, v), gradient angle (a), moving range (± h', ± v'), operation mode (linear), and plane to the specified R register.
  • Page 812 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode  Circular interpolation By specifying a hypothetical coordinate on the machine coordinate as shown in the figure below, jog feed or handle feed can be executed on the hypothetical coordinate.
  • Page 813 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode Operation The following shows how to enable the circular feed in manual mode. (1) Select either JOG mode or handle mode. (2) Set the coordinates of reference point (h1, v1), gradient arc center (h2, v2), moving range (± h', ± v'), operation mode (arc), and plane to the specified R register.

  • Page 814: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode 14.32.3 Precautions (1) This function is available in the JOG or handle mode, manual rapid traverse and incremental feed. (2) This function works for the H axis and V axis. This function cannot be used for the other NC axes and PLC axis. When this function is valid, all the axes other than H axis and V axis move as usual.

  • Page 815: Timing Chart

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode 14.32.4 Timing chart The timing chart for the circular feed in manual mode is shown below. Circular feed in manual mode valid Coordinate settings Any change of the data is not valid Circular feed in Data is not...

  • Page 816: Usage Example

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode 14.32.5 Usage example A concrete example with PLC setting increment type "B" and using a metric system is shown below. When performing oblique linear interpolation with the mirror image disabled Device Signal name Data (HEX)
  • Page 817 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode When performing oblique linear interpolation with the mirror image enabled Device Signal name Data (HEX) Data (DEC) R2636, R2637 Circular feed in manual mode: Operation mode data 0101, 0000 X-Y plane, Linear-Linear (Mirror im- age using "Y' "...
  • Page 818 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode When performing circular interpolation with the mirror image disabled Device Signal name Data (HEX) Data (DEC) R2636, R2637 Circular feed in manual mode: Operation mode data 0002, 0000 X-Y plane, Arc-Linear (Clockwise direction is regarded as the "+"...
  • Page 819 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode When performing circular interpolation with the mirror image enabled Device Signal name Data (HEX) Data (DEC) R2636, R2637 Circular feed in manual mode: Operation mode data 0103, 0000 X-Y plane, Arc-Linear (Counter clockwise direction is regarded as...
  • Page 820 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode When operating the CNC by switching the travel range in arc interpolation performed by specifying an angle Device Signal name Data (HEX) Data (DEC) R2636, R2637 Circular feed in manual mode: Operation mode data 0002, 0000...
  • Page 821 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.32 Circular Feed in Manual Mode  Example where the travel range is "B" in the figure 1 Device Signal name Data (HEX) Data (DEC) R2652, R2653 Circular feed in manual mode: Travel range H (+) data 3D60, 0008 540000 R2656, R2657 Circular feed in manual mode: Travel range H (-) data 0000, 0000...

  • Page 822: Plc Axis Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control 14.33 PLC Axis Control This function allows an independent axis to be controlled with commands from the user PLC, separately from the NC control axis. 14.33.1 Specifications Item Details Simultaneous control...

  • Page 823: Detailed Explanation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control [Other restrictions]  There is no mirror image, external deceleration or machine lock function.  Rapid traverse override, cutting override and dry run control are not possible. ...

  • Page 824: Plc Interface

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control 14.33.3 PLC Interface The PLC and NC interface is carried out by turning ON the PLC axis control valid signal or the PLC axis control buffering mode valid signal after the PLC sets the control information data in the R register.
  • Page 825 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control  PLC axis control buffering mode information address The PLC axis control buffering mode information address stores head R registers of the buffering mode control information for each PLC axis.

  • Page 826: Details Of Plc Axis Control Information Data

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control 14.33.4 Details of PLC Axis Control Information Data Status The status is set by the NC to indicate the execution status of this function instruction and the status of the axis being controlled.
  • Page 827 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control bitE: ALM2 Axis in control alarm This bit turns ON when an alarm occurs (such as a servo alarm) during execution of axis control. Axis control cannot be executed while this bit is ON.
  • Page 828 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control Alarm details The alarm Nos. of status ALM1 and ALM2 are set. ALM1 Alam No. ALM2 Alam No. R1n+2 (1st axis) The details of each alarm No. are shown below. ALM1 (Control information data designation alarm) Alarm No.
  • Page 829 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control Control signals (PLC axis control information data) Control signals such as start, interlock, reset, axis removal and axis removal 2 are designated for the PLC axis. R1n+3 (1st axis) bit0: Start...
  • Page 830 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control Axis specification PLC axis No. is designated. Axis specification (1st axis) 0: 1st axis 1: 2nd axis 2: 3rd axis 3: 4th axis 4: 5th axis 5: 6th axis 6: 7th axis 7: 8th axis...
  • Page 831 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control Feedrate When the operation mode is cutting feed or jog feed (register for operation mode is "1" to "3"), the PLC axis feedrate is designated with a binary code. Feedrate (1st axis) Designation value: 1 to 1000000 mm/min.

  • Page 832: Timing Chart

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control Remaining distance The remaining distance of the movement data output to the machine system is expressed. Remaining distance (input unit) (1st axis) Note (1) Refer to the explanations of "#1003 iunit" and "#1005 plcunit" in "14.33.1 Specifications" for details on the unit. (2) The remaining distance of the PLC axis, to which the PLC axis control valid signal is ON, is automatically updated.
  • Page 833 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control For reference position return feed mode  Dog-type reference position return PLC axis control valid signal Start busy move (G1 mode) Speed Note (1) The axis moves by reference position return feed only during start ON. Turn the start OFF after confirming that the reference position has been reached.
  • Page 834 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control For handle feed mode PLC axis control valid signal Start busy move Handle Speed Note (1) Handle feed is possible only during start ON. When the interlock signal is ON (= 1) PLC axis control valid signal Start...
  • Page 835 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control When the reset signal is ON (= 1) PLC axis control valid signal Start Reset busy move Speed When the servo OFF signal is ON (= 1) PLC axis control valid signal Start...

  • Page 836: Reference Position Return Near Point Detection

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control When the PLC axis control valid signal is OFF (= 0) PLC axis control valid signal Start busy move Speed 14.33.6 Reference Position Return Near Point Detection Set the near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference position return for the following devices in the PLC.

  • Page 837: Single Mode

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control 14.33.8 Single Mode In the single mode, the command to PLC axis (control information data) is set in one block. Only one command is used for the PLC axis control.
  • Page 838 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control Timing chart G1 -> G1 -> G0 -> G1 (same axis) PLC axis control valid signal Start busy move wait Start busy move wait Start busy move wait Speed...
  • Page 839 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control G0 -> G1 -> G 1-> G0 (two axes) PLC axis control valid signal Axis number Start busy move wait Axis number Start busy move wait Axis number Start...

  • Page 840: Plc Axis Monitor

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control 14.33.10 PLC Axis Monitor The PLC axis operation status can be confirmed by checking the PLC section on the servo monitor. 14.33.11 Absolute Position Detection The absolute position of the PLC axis can be detected in the same manner as the NC control axis. The initial setting operations are the same as the NC control axis.

  • Page 841: Usage Example

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control 14.33.13 Usage Example The following shows an example of the PLC axis control ladder for the 1st PLC axis in single mode. PLC axis control start signal M8000 PLS M8001 PLC axis control start pulse...

  • Page 842: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.33 PLC Axis Control 14.33.14 Precautions (1) When either of a master axis or slave axis of synchronous control is in NC axis mode of NC axis/PLC axis switchover, an alarm occurs if "Start"...

  • Page 843: Plc Axis Indexing

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.1 Functions PLC axis indexing is used to move the PLC axis to the positioning destination or an arbitrary coordinate position. This function is applied to tool exchange and magazine control. Positioning command methods ...
  • Page 844 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Operation functions  Automatic mode The axis is positioned automatically.  Manual mode Stations will be determined manually. While the start signal is ON, the axis will be rotated at a constant speed. When the start signal is OFF, the axis will be positioned at the nearest station.

  • Page 845: Programming And Setting

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.2 Programming and Setting 14.34.2.1 Operation Function: Automatic Mode The axis is positioned automatically. The axis will be positioned at the designated station by turning ON Operation start (ST). The arbitrary position command operation is also available: the positioning can be carried out to any position other than a station by directly commanding the positioning coordinates from the PLC.
  • Page 846 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing (*1) The operation of station position (STO1 to STO256) represents the one when "#12801 aux_Cont1/bit5" is OFF. When "#12801 aux_Cont1/bit5" is ON, the nearest station No. will be output. (Station No. constantly output) The previous station No.
  • Page 847 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Short-cut control This function automatically judges the direction for the least rotation when positioning the axis to a station in automatic mode. When the shortcut control is enabled ("#12802 aux_Cont1/bit9" is set to "1"), the axis will be rotated and positioned in the direction for the least rotation.
  • Page 848 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing  For linear axis [When uniform assignment is applied] Special operation of linear axis in uniform assignment Shifting from position where When starting from outside of more than one station distance the "near range", positioning away from the both stroke ends...
  • Page 849 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Set the following signal in addition to the general automatic mode setting before the operation start. Abbreviation Signal name Explanations Arbitrary coordinate designation en- The positioning destination input from the PLC will be enabled. abled Keep this signal ON during arbitrary coordinate designation operation.

  • Page 850: Operation Function: Manual Mode

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.2.2 Operation Function: Manual Mode The axis is positioned manually. Turning ON Operation start (ST) signal moves the axis; turning the signal OFF places the axis at the nearest station position. Preparation Set the following signals before operation.

  • Page 851: Operation Function: Jog Mode

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Note (1) When performing the manual operation with a linear axis, the axis starts to move in either case where the axis is inside or outside the stroke range. In the case where the operation start (ST) is turned OFF when the axis is outside the stroke range, the axis stop position depends on the timing when the operation start (ST) is turned off or the content of the parameter (#12803 aux_Cont2/ bit4).
  • Page 852 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Operation Turning ON Operation start (ST) moves the axis in the designated direction. Turning the signal OFF causes the axis immediately decelerates to stop. [JOG mode] JOG operation mode (J) Value at ST’s ON is valid Rotation direction (DIR)

  • Page 853: Operation Function: Incremental Feed

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.2.4 Operation Function: Incremental Feed The axis is moved by the designated amount. Turning Operation start (ST) ON feeds the axis by the constant amount. Preparation Set the following signals before operation.

  • Page 854: Operation Function: Manual Handle Feed

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.2.5 Operation Function: Manual Handle Feed The axis is moved by the manual pulse generator. Preparation Set the following signals before operation. Abbreviation Signal name Explanations Use this signal to select handle mode.

  • Page 855: Operation Function: Reference Position Return

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.2.6 Operation Function: Reference Position Return Reference position return is executed. PLC axis indexing allows the reference position return at high-speed which returns the axis to the machine coordinate zero point determined by the absolute position initialization set.

  • Page 856: Machine Compensation Function: Backlash Compensation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.2.7 Machine Compensation Function: Backlash Compensation This function compensates the error (backlash) when the movement direction is reversed. When the axis movement direction is reversed, the compensation amount set in the parameter "#2011 G0back (G0 backlash)"...

  • Page 857: Protection Function: Stored Stroke Limit

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.2.9 Protection Function: Stored Stroke Limit Movable range is set for linear axis to prevent the shaft end from clashing into the machine. This function is available only for axis whose reference position is established. Command values must be within the set value in any operation mode.

  • Page 858: Miscellaneous Function: Feedrate Override

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.2.11 Miscellaneous Function: Feedrate Override The feedrate set in the parameter will be effective after multiplied by override (%). Override, ranging from 0 to 100% and commanded in 1% units, is valid for all movement except that in the handle mode.
  • Page 859 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Changing process  Changing NC control to PLC control When changing NC control to PLC control in the program execution, confirm the smoothing zero is set for all the axes in the part system before making the sequence program for NC axis control selection.
  • Page 860 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Monitor screen Operation screen shows the NC axis name when NC/PLC control selection is allowed. The status "CT" will be displayed besides the counter display of the axis under PLC control. (Example) Display of an axis, applicable to NC/PLC control selection, under PLC control The NC axis coordinate value counter will be updated even in PLC control.
  • Page 861 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Zero point return After zero point return has been executed under NC control or PLC control, the system regards that zero point return has also been done under the other control. Restrictions ...

  • Page 862: Setup

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.3 Setup 14.34.3.1 Initial Parameter Settings: Selecting Axes to Use in PLC Axis Indexing (#12800) Select axes to use in PLC axis indexing. Both PLC axis and NC axis can be used in PLC axis indexing. Select NC control or PLC control in "NC axis control selection n-th axis"...
  • Page 863 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing When using 2nd and 3rd PLC axes, 4th and 5th NC axes in PLC axis indexing Number of part systems: 1 Number of NC axes: 6 Number of PLC axes: 4 [Base system parameters] #1001 SYS_ON...

  • Page 864: Initial Parameter Settings: Setting The Control Parameter 1

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.3.2 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting the Control Parameter 1 Set each control parameter. Setting range Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations (unit) Set this parameter in hexadecimal format. The bits that are not explained here must be aux_Cont1 Control parameter 12802...

  • Page 865: Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Stations (#12801 To #12805, #12850 To #12868)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.3.3 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Stations (#12801 to #12805, #12850 to #12868) Set the positioning destinations (stations). When assigning stations with evenly-spaced intervals: Uniform assignment When assigning stations to arbitrary coordinates: Arbitrary coordinate assignment Uniform assignment setting Uniform assignment will be selected by turning OFF "#12803 aux_Cont2/bit4".
  • Page 866 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing  Related parameters Setting range Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations (unit) Set this parameter in hexadecimal format. The bits that are not explained here must be set to "0". aux_Cont2 Control parameter 12803...
  • Page 867 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing  For linear axis Reference position = Station 1 stpos 2 stpos 5 stpos 6 stpos 3 stpos4 [Linear axis arbitrary coordinate assignment (with station offset)] Reference position Station 1 stpos 6...
  • Page 868 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Setting for station No. automatic assignment direction The station No. assignment direction can be selected with parameters. #1018 ccw Explanations Assign the station Nos. in the motor rotation CW direction. When forward run is selected in "Rotation direc- tion"...

  • Page 869: Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Operation Parameter Groups (#12810 To #12848)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.3.4 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Operation Parameter Groups (#12810 to #12848) A group of parameters related to feed control, such as axis feedrate and acceleration/deceleration time constatnt, is called an "operation parameter group".
  • Page 870 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing POINT Operation parameter group 1 automatic operation speed (aux_Aspeed1) functions as clamp speed in all operations. A feedrate exceeding aux_Aspeed1 cannot be commanded. Setting the acceleration/deceleration pattern and time constant Set the automatic operation mode acceleration/deceleration type in the parameter "#1361 aux_acc".
  • Page 871 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Parame- Setting range Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations ter No. (unit) Operation parameter group 1 12812 aux_time1.1 Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for "Operation Acceleration/deceler- parameter group 1 automatic operation speed" (clamp speed) ation time constant 1 when "operation parameter group n"...
  • Page 872 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Setting the torque limit value Set an individual torque limit value (current limit value) to each operation parameter group. Parame- Setting range Abbreviation Parameter name Explanations ter No.
  • Page 873 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing Setting the output width of signals related to the set position Set the following signals: Set position reached (JST) which indicates the machine has completed positioning, detection width of Automatic set position reached (JSTA), and detection width of Near set position (NEAR) which indicates that the machine is near to any stations.

  • Page 874: Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Position Switches (#12870 To #12900)

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.3.5 Initial Parameter Settings: Setting Position Switches (#12870 to #12900) Set the position switch area. Fifteen types of position switches, PSW1 to PSW15, can be set. Parame- Setting range Abbreviation...

  • Page 875: Absolute Position Zero Point Initialization Set: Machine End Stopper Method

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.3.6 Absolute Position Zero Point Initialization Set: Machine End Stopper Method This method determines the absolute position basic point by pushing the axis against the machine, etc. ...

  • Page 876: Absolute Position Zero Point Initial Setting: Marked Point Alignment Method

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.34 PLC Axis Indexing 14.34.3.7 Absolute Position Zero Point Initial Setting: Marked Point Alignment Method This method determines the absolute position basic point by aligning the axis to the marked point on the machine. ...

  • Page 877: Nc Axis/Plc Axis Switchover

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover 14.35.1 Outline This function is to use one drive unit by switching the control from the NC or the PLC dynamically. The function of the NC axis can be used during the NC axis control and the function of the PLC axis can be used during the PLC axis control respectively.

  • Page 878: Details

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover 14.35.2 Details Example of parameter setting Assuming there are 3 NC-exclusive axes, 1 PLC-exclusive axis and 1 switching axis, and if the 4th NC axis is switched to the 2nd PLC axis, set the PLC axis No.
  • Page 879 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover Switching axes Switching between NC axis and PLC axis can be performed with NC axis/PLC axis switchover request signal (NPCHGREQn:YBC0). When controlling as PLC axis, turn ON the signal and when controlling as NC axis, turn OFF the signal.
  • Page 880 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover Command from outside the mode If PLC axis command (command from PLC axis I/F) is issued to the axis in NC axis mode, PLC axis command is ignored and NC axis command continues.
  • Page 881 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover Valid signals in PLC axis mode In NC axis mode, all PLC axis signals are invalid; however, in PLC axis mode, part of NC axis signals is valid. The following shows the NC axis signals which are valid even in PLC axis mode.

  • Page 882: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover 14.35.3 Relation with Other Functions Function name Specification External deceleration The axis in PLC axis mode does not become the external deceleration speed even if the External deceleration + signal (*+EDT1 to 8) or External deceleration - (*-EDT1 to 8) sig- nal is turned OFF.
  • Page 883 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover Function name Specification CHOPPING The axis in PLC axis mode cannot be specified to the chopping axis. The operation error (M01 0154) occurs when the chopping starts. The axis in chopping cannot be switched to PLC axis mode.

  • Page 884: Synchronous Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover 14.35.3.1 Synchronous Control Synchronous control can be performed to the axis where NC axis/PLC axis switchover is performed either in NC axis mode or PLC axis mode. To execute the synchronous control using the NC axis/PLC axis switchover target axis, both master and slave axes where the synchronous control is performed need to be the NC axis/PLC axis switchover target axes.
  • Page 885 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover Operation procedure  When starting synchronous control (1) Set the control modes of both master and slave axes to NC axis mode. (2) Start synchronous control. At this time, if either of the axes is in PLC axis mode, the operation error (M01 1036) occurs.

  • Page 886: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.35 NC Axis/PLC Axis Switchover 14.35.4 Precautions (1) When there are as many non-switchable PLC-exclusive axes as the maximum number of PLC axes, this function cannot be used. When the said condition is satisfied with the parameter "#2187 chgPLCax" set to nonzero, the alarm (Y05 2187) occurs at the power ON.

  • Page 887: External Search

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.36 External Search 14.36 External Search External search is a function that searches the machining program according to the machining program storage device, program No., sequence No. and block No. designated from the user PLC. 14.36.1 Detailed Explanation The flow of the external search execution process is given below.

  • Page 888: Plc -> Nc Interface Signal

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.36 External Search 14.36.2 PLC -> NC Interface Signal Part system No. Signal name 1st part 2nd part 3rd part 4th part 5th part 6th part 7th part 8th part system system system...

  • Page 889: Nc -> Plc Interface Signal

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.36 External Search  External search strobe The NC starts the external search at the rising edge of this signal. The block specified with program No. (R2526), sequence No. (R2528) and block No. (R2530) are searched. When either or both of the program No.
  • Page 890 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.36 External Search External search status The correspondence of the external search status values and details output from the NC based on the external search is shown below. Status value Details Remedy Normally finished...
  • Page 891 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.36 External Search Timing chart The timing chart for the program return is shown below. Program return signal (PLC -> NC) Processing program return (NC internal state) Program return completed signal (NC ->...

  • Page 892: Returning To The Previous Machining Program Before The External Search

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.36 External Search 14.36.4 Returning to the Previous Machining Program Before the External Search The control returns to the previous machining program selected before the external search with the return method set in the parameter.

  • Page 893: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.36 External Search Restrictions The following restrictions are imposed on return to the previous program before the external search.  When the following operations are performed after completing the external search, this function cannot return to the stored program.

  • Page 894: Usage Example

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.36 External Search 14.36.6 Usage Example An example of the external search ladder for 1st part system is shown below. External search start signal M8000 PLS M8001 External search start pulse External search start pulse M8001 MOV D101 R2525...

  • Page 895: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.36 External Search 14.36.7 Relation with Other Functions Control unit-side high-speed program server mode If there is no specification for the control unit-side high-speed program server mode, you cannot designate "4" (high-speed program server) as the external search device No.

  • Page 896: Direct Screen Selection

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.37 Direct Screen Selection 14.37 Direct Screen Selection The direct screen selection is the function to control the screen transition of NC screens by the user PLC. An arbitrary NC screen can be selected by setting the screen selection information to file register. The following each screen can be selected as the screen transition direction: Monitor screen, Setup screen, Edit screen, Diagnosis screen, Maintenance screen and Customization screen.

  • Page 897: Screen Selection Information

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.37 Direct Screen Selection 14.37.1 Screen Selection Information The descriptions of the screen selection information (file registers) are shown below. R register Description Setting value 0: Initial state 1: Screen selection requirement R356 Selection requirement/completion data 4: Screen selection completion...
  • Page 898 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.37 Direct Screen Selection Value of function No. (R357) Screen Function No. Monitor screen Setup screen Edit screen Diagnosis screen Maintenance screen SFP screen F0 screen Window display Window selection Note (1) When 9, 10, 13 and 14 is set to the function No., DIRECT_SCREEN item of config.ini needs to be set to "1".
  • Page 899 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.37 Direct Screen Selection [Setting range when DIRECT_SCREEN of config.ini is "1" and the screen/window No. is designated] Screen Value of R357 Value of R358 Value of R359 Monitor screen Main menu Window No.

  • Page 900: Timing Chart

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.37 Direct Screen Selection (4) Designate the screen No. or window No. of each screen, using the offset No. of the module to display + screen (window) Do not designate a window No. for screen No. Conversely, do not designate a screen No. for a window No. The offset No.

  • Page 901: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.37 Direct Screen Selection 14.37.3 Precautions (1) The operation when the screen selection requirement while executing some processing on the screen is as same as when the key where the screen transition is generated (ex. function key) is pressed. Examples are shown below. (a) File editing on the Edit screen: The screen transits after confirming save.

  • Page 902: Buzzer Sound Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.38 Buzzer Sound Control 14.38 Buzzer Sound Control This function activates a buzzer mounted on the NC keyboard by operating the PLC device (buzzer sound control (Y1C83)). The buzzer will be activated when the PLC device is turned ON, and be deactivated when the PLC device is turned OFF. This is effective in applications of sounding a buzzer such as during the alarm occurrence, or for the program operation end notification.

  • Page 903: Mes Interface Library

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.39 MES Interface Library 14.39 MES Interface Library MES interface library function enables to link the CNC internal data with the database of information system (manufacturing execution system). For example, it becomes possible to carry out the production management, traceability, etc. from the registered information by registering the information at the time of machining completion, alarm occurrence or user's option to the database as shown by the figure below.

  • Page 904: Power Consumption Computation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.40 Power Consumption Computation 14.40 Power Consumption Computation 14.40.1 Outline This function enables you to obtain the present power consumption and accumulated power consumption. Power consumption means the sum of the power consumed by the drive system for rotating and moving servo axes and spindles, and that consumed by the other electrical equipment of the machine.
  • Page 905 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.40 Power Consumption Computation As the figure below illustrates the flow of the power consumption monitor process. The items (1) to (15) in this figure correspond to the items given in the previous page. <<Set by MTB>>...

  • Page 906: Power Consumption Monitor Setting

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.40 Power Consumption Computation 14.40.2 Power Consumption Monitor Setting When you calculate the present power consumption, accumulated power consumption 1 to 4 or accumulated power consumption history, you need to set the following parameters, R registers and control data (X and Y devices). The data to set and the control data are listed as follows.

  • Page 907: Present Power Consumption

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.40 Power Consumption Computation 14.40.3 Present Power Consumption During the power ON, you can obtain the present power consumptions (1) to (7) as illustrated in Figure below. Among the values, a plus means power consumption, while a minus means power regeneration. (6) Drive system total consumption Variation in drive system (5) Fixed...
  • Page 908 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.40 Power Consumption Computation Illustrated below is a timing chart of the operation to obtain the accumulated power consumption data. Power Enable consumption accumulation1 to 4 signal (Y724 or later) Clearing consumption accumulation 1 to 4 signal (Y700 or later)

  • Page 909: Accumulated Power Consumption History

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.40 Power Consumption Computation 14.40.5 Accumulated Power Consumption History According to the parameters "#1371 PwrIntegIntvl (Power consumption accumulation interval)" and "#1392 StartTimeIPC (Power consumption accumulation start time)", the control records the accumulated power consumption (1) and (2) as shown in the figure below and the time stamp (Accumulation start time) in a file so that the accumulation data can be obtained as an accumulated consumption history file.
  • Page 910 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.40 Power Consumption Computation  Operation details of accumulated power consumption history When creating the accumulated power consumption history starts, the time stamp (Accumulation start time) is recorded in the first history data.
  • Page 911 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.40 Power Consumption Computation Accumulated power consumption history data You can obtain the accumulated power consumption history under the following file name. File format and name Format File name M01:\LOG\PWCSP.CSV ...

  • Page 912: Precautions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 14 PLC Help Function 14.40 Power Consumption Computation  Example of accumulated power consumption history file When the "#1371 PwrIntegIntvl (Power consumption accumulation interval)" is set to "24", and the "#1392 StartTimeIPC (Power consumption accumulation start time)" is set to "0": Accumulated Accumulated Accumulation...

  • Page 913: Ecomonitorlight Connection

    EcoMonitorLight connection is a function to enable NC system to collect and manage the electric power of the machine tool which is measured by the Mitsubishi Electric energy measuring unit "EcoMonitorLight". The electric power (mainly consumed and regenerated power) of entire machine tool and peripheral devices can be measured by connecting EcoMonitorLight to the main breaker of the machine tool or the breaker of the peripheral devices (motor, coolant, etc.) which configure the machine tool.

  • Page 914: Multi-Axis And Multi-Part System

    Multi-axis and Multi-part System IB-1501668-B...

  • Page 915: Arbitrary Axis Exchange Control

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.1 Arbitrary Axis Exchange Control 15.1 Arbitrary Axis Exchange Control An arbitrary axis can be exchanged freely across part systems in the multiple part systems. The machining can be freer in the multiple part systems by exchanging an axis which can be commanded for machining programs in each part system.

  • Page 916: Cnc Control Signals And Cnc Status Signals

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.1 Arbitrary Axis Exchange Control 15.1.1 CNC Control Signals and CNC Status Signals The CNC control signal and CNC status signal per axis are used for basic axis placement. For this reason, outputting the optional axis exchange command (G140), optional axis exchange return command (G141), and basic axis placement return command G142) will not change the axis to which the signals correspond.

  • Page 917: Control Axis Superimposition Ii

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.2 Control Axis Superimposition II 15.2 Control Axis Superimposition II There are two types of control axis superimposition according to command method: Control axis superimposition I and Control axis superimposition II. Control axis superimposition I: G command Control axis superimposition II: PLC signal command For selection, set the base specifications parameter "#1280 ext16/bit7".

  • Page 918: Single Block Between Part Systems

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.3 Single Block Between Part Systems 15.3 Single Block Between Part Systems Single block operation between part systems is the function for executing single block operation while maintaining the synchronization among the part systems when two or more part systems are operated in the multi-part system.

  • Page 919: Description Of Operation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.3 Single Block Between Part Systems 15.3.2 Description of Operation Operation to disable stopping of single block operations Single block operation can be specified per part system, which enables cycle operation of other part systems to be suspended by stopping single block operation for one part system and enables cycle operation of other part systems to be suspended by stopping single block operation for any part system.

  • Page 920: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.3 Single Block Between Part Systems Cycle operation startup after stopping single block operation and cycle operation suspension Start cycle start for all part systems after stopping single block operation or suspending cycle start while operating single block between part systems.

  • Page 921: Synchronization Between Part Systems Off

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.4 Synchronization Between Part Systems OFF 15.4 Synchronization Between Part Systems OFF Synchronization between part systems and feedrate change are turned OFF in a part of a machining program to eliminate a synchronization between part systems by single block operation between part systems or variation of a machining program feedrate by dry run.

  • Page 922: Description Of Operation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.4 Synchronization Between Part Systems OFF 15.4.1 Description of Operation System variable control By assigning values to system variables #3003 and #3004, you can enable and disable various functions. ...

  • Page 923: Relation With Other Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.4 Synchronization Between Part Systems OFF 15.4.2 Relation with Other Functions  Sub part system control II When performing sub part system calls, signals such as the cutting feed override and rapid traverse override signals in sub part systems are used as main part system signals, but the synchronization between part systems OFF (MSYNC) signal and the dry run disabled (DRNC) signal are used as sub part system signals.

  • Page 924: Sub Part System Control I

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.5 Sub Part System Control I 15.5 Sub Part System Control I This function activates and operates any non-operating part system (sub part system) in the multi-part system. Sub part system control I can be used in the same manner as calling subprogram in a non-operating part system. An auxiliary axis machining program can be controlled in the sub part system by commanding Sub part system control I (G122) from the main part system.

  • Page 925: Sub Part System Control Ii

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 15 Multi-axis and Multi-part System 15.6 Sub Part System Control II 15.6 Sub Part System Control II This function activates and operates any non-operating part system (sub part system) in the multi-part system. Using sub part systems enables parallel operation between an operating program in main part system and a program called with Sub part system control II (G144).

  • Page 926: External Plc Link

    External PLC link IB-1501668-B...

  • Page 927: Cc-Link

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1 CC-Link NC module can be connected to the PLC network to serve as the master (Ver.2 mode)/local (Ver.1 mode and Ver.2 mode) station of the MELSEC CC-Link. CC-Link is the abbreviation of Control &...
  • Page 928 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link  Outline drawing (M800VW Series) Master station Master station (NC unit) Remote I/O station CC - Link Expansion card FCU8-EX561 Remote device station Partner manufacturer product CC - Link...

  • Page 929: Performance Specifications

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.1 Performance Specifications M8V Series is compliant with CC-Link Ver.1.10 and Ver.2.00. CC-Link master/local module Item Ver.1.10 Ver.2.00 Remote I/O (RX, RY) 2048 points 8192 points each each Maximum number of link Remote register (RWw) 256 points...
  • Page 930 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Item CC-Link master/local module The number of occupied 1 to 4 stations (Select by parameter) stations (Local stations) Transmission speed Can select from 156 kbps / 625 kbps / 2.5 Mbps / 5 Mbps / 10 Mbps (Select by parameter) Communication method Polling method Synchronous method Frame synchronization method...
  • Page 931 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Item CC-Link master/local module Version 1.10 compatible CC-Link dedicated cable (terminal resistor of 110Ω used) Transmission Maximum overall cable speed distance 156 kbps 1200 m 625 kbps 900 m Maximum overall cable 2.5 Mbps 400 m...

  • Page 932: Usable Functions

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.2 Usable Functions Of all the CC-Link functions, the following functions can be used with the NC. ○ : Available ×: Not available -: Not relevant MELSEC NC module Function item Master station Master station Local station...

  • Page 933: Machine Input/Output Signal Allocation By Cc-Link

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Note (1) When installing two FCU8-EX561, these cannot be used as master stations at a time. (2) Refer to "CC-Link Specifications manual" (BNP-C3072-089) on parameter setting. (3) When connecting NC with GX Developer as a slave station, set it as the intelligent device station. 16.1.2.1 Machine Input/Output Signal Allocation by CC-Link Input/output device allocation when CC-Link module is mounted is as shown below.

  • Page 934: Communication Data

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.3 Communication Data 16.1.3.1 Communication Data Flow The flow of data communicated by the CC-Link’s link scan is as follows. (The master station and local station of MELSEC CPU can be also mixed.) NC (Local station) NC (Master station) Built-in PLC...

  • Page 935: Register Allocation

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.3.2 Register Allocation Allocation of remote input, remote output, remote register by protocol version is as follows. Ver.1 mode  Ver.1 remote input and remote output Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station Local station...
  • Page 936 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 Local station Master station (Station No.1 : Occupied 1 station) (Station No.2 : Occupied 2 stations) : Occupied 1 station) (Station No.5 : Occupied 1 station) Remote output RY Remote input RX...
  • Page 937 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link  Ver.1 remote register Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 Local station Master station (Station No.1 : Occupied 1 station) (Station No.2 : Occupied 2 stations) : Occupied 1 station) (Station No.5 : Occupied 1 station) Remote register RWr...
  • Page 938 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 Local station Master station (Station No.1 : Occupied 1 station) (Station No.2 : Occupied 2 stations) : Occupied 1 station) (Station No.5 : Occupied 1 station) Remote register RWw Remote register RWr...
  • Page 939 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Ver.2 mode  Ver.2 remote input and remote output Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 : Local station (Station No.1 : Occupied (Station No.2 : Occupied Occupied 1 station, set to "Single") (Station No.5 : Occupied Master station...
  • Page 940 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 : Local station (Station No.1 : Occupied (Station No.2 : Occupied Occupied 1 station, set to "Single") (Station No.5 : Occupied Master station 1 station, set to "Double") 2 stations, set to "Single")
  • Page 941 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link  Ver.2 remote register Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 : Local station (Station No.1 : Occupied (Station No.2 : Occupied Occupied 1 station, set to "Single") (Station No.5 : Occupied Master station 1 station, set to "Double")
  • Page 942 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Local station Remote device station Remote I/O station (Station No.4 : Local station (Station No.1 : Occupied (Station No.2 : Occupied Occupied 1 station, set to "Single") (Station No.5 : Occupied Master station 1 station, set to "Double") 2 stations, set to "Single")

  • Page 943: Automatic Refresh

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.3.3 Automatic Refresh Data transfer between the CC-Link master/local module and the NC built-in PLC device is performed automatically. Set the destination device to be automatically refreshed to the parameters "#24014+40(n-1) RX dev name" to "#24025+40(n-1) SW dev No."...

  • Page 944: Occupied Number Of Stations Of The System And Settable Range Of The Device

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.3.4 Occupied Number of Stations of the System and Settable Range of the Device The device range allocated for CC-Link remote I/O (RX, RY) and remote register (RWw, RWr) varies depending on the number of occupied stations (number of actually linked points) set per system.

  • Page 945: Data Guarantee Of Cyclic Data At The Time Of Communication Between Master And Local Stations

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link (3) When changing CC-Link system configuration, always confirm that the parameters of all the NCs connected with CC-Link is within the range. (Example) When the number of occupied stations is set to 30 per system in CC-Link Ver.1 mode ...

  • Page 946: Standby Master Function

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.4 Standby Master Function This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station (backup station for the master station) if a malfunction occurs in the master station. The master station can return to online even during data link controlled by the standby master station, and prepares itself for standby master station's system down.

  • Page 947: Method Of Setting

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Continued from the previous page Failure occurs in the standby master station -> Data link is controlled by the master station Master station Standby master station Station No. 1 -> 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Controlling...

  • Page 948: Overview Of Link Data Transmission When Standby Master Function Is In Use

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.4.2 Overview of Link Data Transmission When Standby Master Function Is in Use Below is the outline of how link data are transmitted when standby master function is in use. When master station controls data link: ...
  • Page 949 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link When master station is faulty -> Standby master station controls data link  Standby master station output Standby master station (controlling) Master station Station No.1 -> 0 Remote Remote Remote Remote...
  • Page 950 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Master station's recovery -> Standby master station controls data link  Standby master station output Master station (waiting) Standby master station (controlling) Station No.0 -> 1 : Occupies 1 station Station No.0 Remote Remote...
  • Page 951 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Standby master station becomes faulty -> Master station controls data link:  Master station output Master station (controlling) Station No.1 -> 0 Standby master station Remote Remote Remote Remote input RX output RY...

  • Page 952: Points To Note When Using Standby Master Function

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.4.3 Points to Note When Using Standby Master Function (1) Only one standby master station resides in a single data link system. (2) The total number of stations is 64, including standby master station. (3) If a master station error is detected in the initial state (before parameter communication starts), switching to the standby master station won't be carried out.

  • Page 953: On/Off Timings Of Link Special Relays (Sb) Relating To Standby Master Function

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.4.4 ON/OFF Timings of Link Special Relays (SB) Relating to Standby Master Function The following shows the ON/OF timings of the link special relays (SB) relating to the standby master function. SB70 (Master station information) SB7B...

  • Page 954: Program Example When Using Standby Master (Master Station Duplex) Function

    M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link 16.1.4.5 Program Example When Using Standby Master (Master Station Duplex) Function A program when using the standby master function (master station duplex function) is generated under the following conditions.
  • Page 955 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link  Program example when using standby master function (master station duplex function) (a) to (d) on the left correspond to those of the timing chart in "ON/OFF Timings of Link Special Relays (SB) Relating to Standby Master Function".
  • Page 956 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link  When data link control is compulsorily transferred from standby master station to master station The parts enclosed with broken or dotted lines in "Program example when using standby master function (master station duplex function)"...

  • Page 957: Transient Function

    ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ G.RIRD G.RIRD/RIWT 7 steps GP.RIRD GP.RIRD/RIWT 11 steps These instructions are directed to the master/local stations of either QnCPU or Mitsubishi Electric CNC. IB-1501668-B...
  • Page 958 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Setting data RIRD instruction Setting data Description Start I/O number of the host station Start number of the host station's device in which control data is stored. Start number of the device where data to read is stored. Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of reading.
  • Page 959 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Control data RIRD instruction Setting Data is set by Device Item Setting data range (*1) Completion status Stores the status when the instruction is complete. System (S1) + 0 0: No error (normal completion) Other than 0 : Error code Station No.
  • Page 960 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link Access code/Attribute code Device memory in the CPU Device type Device meaning Name Unit Access code Attribute code Word Input relay Hexadecimal ○ Output relay Hexadecimal ○ Internal relay Decimal ○...
  • Page 961 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 16 External PLC link 16.1 CC-Link IB-1501668-B...

  • Page 962: Appx.1: Example Of Faulty Circuit

    Appx.1: Example of Faulty Circuit IB-1501668-B...
  • Page 963 M800V/M80V Series PLC Programming Manual (2/2) 17 Appx.1: Example of Faulty Circuit The following conditions results in the faulty circuit. Correct the circuit. Circuits occurring any faulty -> Correct circuit  Circuit containing OR  Rounding circuit Necessity Whether Y10 condition includes X3, X4 and X2 or not is unknown.
  • Page 964 Jul. 2021 IB(NA)1501667-B Contents were revised to correspond to Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800VS/M80V Series. IB(NA)1501668-B Contents were revised to correspond to Mitsubishi Electric CNC M800V/M80V Series software ver- sion A1. The following chapters were changed. 2.2.2 Range of Usable Project 2.6.1 Number and Types of Registerable Programs...
  • Page 965 TEL: +420-59-5691-185 / FAX: +420-59-5691-199 BRAZIL Russia Service Center MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC RUSSIA LLC MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC DO BRASIL COMÉRCIO E SERVIÇOS LTDA. LETNIKOVSKAYA STREET 2, BLD.1, 5TH 115114 MOSCOW, RUSSIA Votorantim Office TEL: +7-495-721-2070 / FAX: +7-495-721-2071 AV. GISELE CONSTANTINO,1578, PARQUE BELA VISTA, VOTORANTIM-SP, BRAZIL CEP:18.110-650...
  • Page 966 ASEAN CHINA Singapore Service Center CNC Call Center 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 TEL: +86-400-921-5130 TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 Shanghai Service Center 1-3,5-10,18-23/F, NO.1386 HONG QIAO ROAD, CHANG NING QU, PHILIPPINE SHANGHAI 200336, CHINA TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2322-3000*8422 MELCO FACTORY AUTOMATION PHILIPPINES INC.
  • Page 967 Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product. Duplication Prohibited This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

This manual is also suitable for:

M800vs seriesM80vw seriesM80v seriesM850vwM830vwM850vs ... Show all

Table of Contents